Yamaha RX-V995 Handleiding

Categorie
Ontvanger
Type
Handleiding
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
AV RECEIVER
AMPLI-TUNER AUDIO-VIDEO
RX-V995
U C A
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating
instructions should be read before the unit is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions
should be followed.
5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near
water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen
sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming
pool, etc.
6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a
cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
6A A unit and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive
force, and uneven surfaces may cause
the unit and
cart combination to overturn.
7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit
should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as
recommended by the manufacturer.
8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its
location or position does not interfere with its proper
ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated
on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the
ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow
of air through the ventilation openings.
9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances
that produce heat.
10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power
supply only of the type described in the operating
instructions or as marked on the unit.
11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or
pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying
particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.
12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as
recommended by the manufacturer.
13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be
unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long
period of time.
14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the
inside of the unit.
15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced
by qualified service personnel when:
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been
damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
unit; or
C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or
D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.
16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit
beyond those means described in the operating
instructions. All other servicing should be referred to
qualified service personnel.
17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away
from power lines.
18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken
so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
CAUTION
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of your unit
in the space below.
Model:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of
the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place
for future reference.
English
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.
Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions
found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this product
is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try
to eliminate the problem by using one of the following
measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the
sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring
or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
19 For US customers only:
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is
connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is
grounded so as to provide some protection against
voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of
the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to
an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a Yamaha Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP)
System—an extremely sophisticated audio component. The DSP system takes full
advantage of Yamaha’s undisputed leadership in the field of digital audio processing
to bring you a whole new world of listening experiences. Follow the instructions in this
manual carefully when setting up your system, and the DSP system will sonically
transform your room into a wide range of listening environments—anything from a
famous concert hall to a cozy jazz club. In addition, you get incredible realism from
most of surround-sound encoded video sources available in the market using the built-
in Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder, Dolby Digital Decoder and DTS Decoder.
Five built-in channels of amplification on this model mean that no additional
amplifiers are required to enjoy advanced digital sound field processing.
Rather than tell you about the wonders of digital sound field processing, however,
let’s get right down to the business of setting up the system and trying out its many
capabilities. Please read this operation manual carefully and store it in a safe place for
later reference.
1
English
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
........................................... Inside of the Front Cover
CAUTION .................................................................. 2
INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 3
Features .................................................................... 3
What’s DSP?............................................................. 4
GETTING STARTED ................................................ 7
Getting started.......................................................... 7
Unpacking.............................................................. 7
Installing batteries in the remote controller ........... 8
Notes about the remote controller.......................... 8
Controls and their functions................................... 9
Front panel............................................................. 9
Display panel........................................................ 11
PREPARATION ...................................................... 12
Speaker setup......................................................... 12
Connections ........................................................... 14
Audio/video source equipment ............................ 14
Speakers ............................................................. 22
Antennas ............................................................. 25
Plugging in this unit ............................................. 27
On screen display.................................................. 28
Selecting the output modes
(“SET MENU” mode) ............................................. 29
Speaker balance adjustment ................................ 32
BASIC OPERATION ............................................... 35
Playing a source .................................................... 35
Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing
from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD)......................... 40
Sound control......................................................... 42
Tuning ..................................................................... 43
Basic operation ................................................... 43
Preset tuning........................................................ 44
Using digital sound field processor (DSP) ......... 47
Playing a source with an effect of the digital
sound field processor (DSP)................................ 47
Adjusting output level of the center, right rear,
left rear speakers and subwoofer......................... 50
Brief overview of digital sound field programs...... 52
ADVANCED FEATURES ....................................... 56
“SET MENU” mode ............................................... 56
Creating your own sound fields .......................... 60
Setting the SLEEP timer ....................................... 65
REMOTE CONTROLLER ....................................... 66
Basic operation (Cover is open) .......................... 66
Using the “learning-capable” keys
(Cover is open)....................................................... 68
Using OPERATION CONTROL keys
(Cover is closed) ................................................... 70
Macro operations (Cover is closed) .................... 72
Methods of learning and clearing functions ....... 74
CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE ......................... 77
TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 79
SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 82
CONTENTS
2
1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from
windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration,
dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming
(transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock,
do not expose the unit to rain or water.
3. Never remove the unit cover. Contact your dealer if an
object falls inside the unit.
4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires.
When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and
the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull on the
wires themselves.
5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of
the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature
inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing
objects against these openings, and install the unit in a
well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage.
<Singapore model>
Be sure to allow a space of at least 10 cm behind, 20 cm
on the both sides and 35 cm above the top panel of the
unit to prevent fire and damage.
6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on
this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than
specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other
accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any
damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other
than specified.
7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with
other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move
this unit farther away from such equipment if interference
is observed.
8. Always set the VOLUME control to “–
” before starting
the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an
appropriate level after playback has been started.
9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents;
this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
10.Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
regarding common operating errors before concluding that
the unit is faulty.
11.When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time,
disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
12.To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power
plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm.
13.Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken
so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not
defeated.
14.Do not connect an audio unit to the AC outlet on the rear
panel if the equipment requires more power than the outlet
is rated to provide.
15.Voltage Selector (China and General Models only)
The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must
be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as
long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit
itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode.
In this mode, this unit is designed to consume a small
amount of power.
FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models
only)
Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in
different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located
at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area.
Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of
this unit from the AC outlet.
For Canadian Customers
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide
slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES–003.
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this
unit may be damaged.
IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE
STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED:
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to
either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit
is in the standby mode.
SPEAKERS
A
B
REAR
SWITCHED
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
60Hz
I00W
CENTER : 4
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 4
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
CENTER : 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
:
I
6
MIN. / SPEAKER
SET BEFORE POWER ON
( SURROUND )
CENTER
MAX.TOTAL
I20V
IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR
(U.S.A. model)
CAUTION : Read this before operating your unit.
3
English
5 Channel Power Amplification
Main: 100W + 100W (8) RMS Output
Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz
Center: 100W (8) RMS Output Power,
0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz
Rear: 100W + 100W (8) RMS Output
Power, 0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz
Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP)
Dolby Digital Decoder
Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder
DTS Decoder
CINEMA DSP:Theater-like Sound
Experience by the Combination of
YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby
Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS
Automatic Input Balance Control for
Dolby Pro Logic Surround
Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker
Balance Adjustment
Speaker Output Mode Selection
Capability for the Most Suitable Use of
Your Speaker System
Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner
40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning
Automatic Preset Tuning
Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset
Editing)
IF Count Direct PLL Synthesizer Tuning
System
Others
“SET MENU”Mode which Provides You
with 13 Titles of Setting Changes and
Adjustments for Optimizing This Unit for
Your Audio/Video System
BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing
Bass Response
On Screen Display Function Helpful in
Controlling This Unit
REC OUT Selector which is Independent of
Input Source Selection
SLEEP Timer
OPTICAL and COAXIAL Digital Audio
Signal Terminals
6 Channel External Decoder Input for Other
Future Formats
Video Signal Input/Output Capability
(Including S Video Connections)
Multi-Functional
remote controller
with
“Learning”Capability
Dual-Room Audio/Video System Setup
Capability (Custom Installation)
Features
INTRODUCTION
4
Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment.
This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV
receiver available. Some of the more advanced features may
not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art
technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater
Systems (DTS) may be new to your home, but you have
probably experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature
films in theaters around the world.
To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this
unit includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening
environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound
field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an
outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take
some time now to read more about these features and enjoy
the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater.
Digital Sound Field Processing
Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30
years have enhanced the listening experience with improved
clarity, precision and power. However, something has still been
missing: The atmosphere and acoustic ambiance of the public
venue. Our Yamaha engineers have extensively researched
the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects
inside a room. We sent these engineers to famous theaters
and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of
those venues with sophisticated microphones. The data they
collected is used to recreate these environments in digital
sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields are created
using data measured directly at the original venue; others are
created from combinations of data to form unique
environments for specific purposes.
Of course, that only solves half of the problem. These
engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your
listening room, so we’ve made it possible for you to adjust the
various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to
your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any
source and in combination with any of the following surround
sound technologies. Some are designed especially for music,
and some especially for movies.
Dolby Pro Logic Surround
Dolby Pro Logic Surround has been used in movie theaters
since the mid-seventies. It has also been available in home
entertainment systems since the late eighties and continues to
be a popular format for home theater systems. It uses four
discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and
dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a
center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound
effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow
frequency range.
Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Pro Logic
Surround encoding as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The
Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder built into this unit employs a
digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel
for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with
standard analog processors.
Introduction
What’s DSP?
INTRODUCTION
5
English
Dolby Digital is the next level of Dolby Surround sound system
developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate
audio coding.
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides
completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby
Digital provides five full range channels in what is sometimes
referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left,
center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only
effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency
effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other
channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE
channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to
the term 5.1 channels in total.
Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system
(left front, center, right front and just one surround channel),
Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or
split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the
three front channels.
By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience
the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo Digital theater
sound in your home.
Wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full range
channels and precise sound orientation by the digital sound
processing presents listeners much excitement and realism
that has never been experienced before.
Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as mentioned left, and
moreover, it can also form fewer channels, for example 2
channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2
channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby
Digital in the market.
Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit
from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be
applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of
Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide
an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. “DOLBY”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Copyright 1992 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to
replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete
channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many
theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system
changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six
discrete channels of superb digital audio.
The DTS technology, through intense research and
development, made it possible to deliver a similar
encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surround-
sound entertainment.
The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which
delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically
5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and
two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as
“0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that
are currently available for home theater systems
The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the
six channels of 20-bit audio onto some laserdiscs, compact
discs and DVDs with considerably less data-compression.
By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can
experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS
installed theater’s high quality sound in your home.
Laserdisc, compact disc and DVD are home audio format
within which DTS can represent its high quality multi-channel
audio. (In addition to movies on laserdiscs, many exciting new
multi-channel music recordings will also become available in
the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.)
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued
and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DTS Digital Surround
Dolby Digital
INTRODUCTION
6
Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields
Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and
the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround-
decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide
acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the
room, letting you feel much presence as if you were
watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater.
This combination is available when the digital sound field
program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of No. 10
is selected, and the input signal of the source is analog,
PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channels.
Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields
Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and
the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby
Digital-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field
respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and
much surround effect in the room without losing high
channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby
Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you
feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby
Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This is the
most ideal home theater sound at the present time.
This combination is available when the digital sound field
program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS
DIGITAL SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected, and the
input signal of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital
(except in 2-channels) or encoded with the DTS.
CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP
The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full
ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are
originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater
that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound
environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is
difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the
number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening
room is very different from a movie theater.
However, Yamaha DSP technology allows you to create nearly
the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in
your home by compensating for the lack of presence and
dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields
combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround
sounds.
The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs
that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP
technology and Dolby Surround or DTS.
CINEMA DSP
INTRODUCTION
7
English
GETTING STARTED
Getting started
Remote controller
User function stickers
Indoor FM Antenna
AM Loop Antenna
Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Batteries (size AA, LR6, UM-3)
Unpacking
Carefully remove this unit and accessories from the box. You should find the unit itself and the following accessories.
8
Installing batteries in the remote
controller
Since the remote controller will be used for many of this unit’s
control operations, you should begin by installing the supplied
batteries.
1. Turn the remote controller over and slide the battery
compartment cover in the direction of the arrow.
2. Insert the batteries (AA, LR6, UM-3 type) according to the
polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment.
3. Close the battery compartment cover.
4. After the batteries are inserted, press the RESET button
before using the remote controller.
Notes about the remote controller
Battery replacement
If you find that the remote controller must be used closer to the
main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with
new ones.
Notes
Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries.
(It is recommended to use an LR6 type to use the remote
controller for a long period of time.)
Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside
the battery compartment.)
Remove the batteries if the remote controller is not used for
an extended period of time.
If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material and contact with clothing, etc.
Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.
Remote controller operation range
Notes
The area between the remote controller and the main unit
must be clear of large obstacles.
Do not expose the remote control sensor to strong lighting,
in particular, an inverter type fluorescent lamp. Otherwise,
the remote controller may not work properly. If necessary,
position the main unit away from direct lighting.
1
3
2
RESET button
30°
30°
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
40 60
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
CT
A
B
Remote control
sensor
Within approximately
6 m (19.7 feet)
GETTING STARTED
9
English
Controls and their functions
Front panel
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITALDIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
8AB0JKLOQMP
N
23 456
79
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
D
MEMORY EDIT FM/AM
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
EFGH
I
1
C
1 STANDBY/ON switch
Press this switch to turn on the power. Press this switch again
to set this unit in the standby mode.
* A click from the switch and the initial rotation of the built-in
fan will be heard when the power is turned on.
Standby mode
This unit is still using a small amount of power in this mode
in order to be ready to receive infrared-signals from the
remote controller.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote controller.
3 Display panel
Displays a variety of information. (Refer to page 11 for details.)
4 EXT. DECODER button
Press this button to select the input signals from the
EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source.
This function takes priority over the INPUT SELECTOR
setting. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display
panel.
The source selected with the INPUT SELECTOR knob
becomes the current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is
not illuminated on the display panel.
5 INPUT SELECTOR
Turn this knob to select the input source.
The selected source will be shown on the display.
6 Master VOLUME control
Simultaneously controls volume for all output sounds; front
effect, main, rear, center and subwoofer. (The REC OUT level
is not affected.)
* The indicator on the master VOLUME control will flash when
the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key on the
remote controller.
7 PHONES jack
Headphones can be plugged into this jack for private listening.
You can listen to the sound to be output from the main
speakers through headphones. When listening with
headphones privately, press both SPEAKERS A and B
switches to cancel both of the main speakers A and B, and
turn off the digital sound field processor by pressing the
EFFECT button so that no DSP program name is illuminated
on the display panel.
For the remote controller, refer to pages 66 to 67.
GETTING STARTED
PHONES
10
8
A/B/C/D/E button
Press this button to select a group (A–E) of preset stations.
9 SPEAKERS switches
Press the switch A or B (or both) for the main speakers you will
use to select them. Press the switch for the main speakers you
will not use again to cancel them. On the display panel,
“SPEAKERS A” and/or “SPEAKERS B” will be illuminated,
depending on which main speakers are being selected.
0 Preset station number selector buttons
Select a preset station number (1 to 8).
A BASS EXTENSION button
Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency
response at the main left and right channels while maintaining
overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing
the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used.
B TONE BYPASS button
Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and
TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting
pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone
control circuitry can be used when this button is released
outward (OFF).
C BASS and TREBLE controls
Rotate these knobs to adjust the low and high frequency
response for the left and right main channels only.
D BALANCE control
This knob controls the sound from the main speakers only.
The balance of the output volume to the left and right main
speakers can be adjusted to compensate for sound imbalances
caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions.
E MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) button
Use this button to enter a station to memory. Refer to the
section “Manual preset tuning” on page 44 for details.
Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start
automatic preset tuning. Refer to page 45 for details.
F EDIT button
This button is used to exchange the places of two preset
stations with each other.
G TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) button
Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic
and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this
button so that the “AUTO” indicator is illuminated on the
display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so
that the “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated.
H FM/AM button
Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and
AM.
I REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector
Rotate this knob to select the source for recording to an MD
recorder (or tape deck) or VCR. This setting is independent of
the INPUT SELECTOR setting, except when the REC
OUT/ZONE 2 selector is set to the SOURCE position. Then
the INPUT SELECTOR is used to select the source for
recording to the MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR.
For a user who made up a dual-room audio/video system
with this unit:
The setting of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector controls the
input source for the second room.
J LEVEL button
This button is used to adjust the output level of the center and
rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this button (several
times) to select the speaker(s). The name appears on the
display. Then press the + or button (
K
) to change the output
level.
K –/+ button
Adjusts the level of the speaker(s) selected by pressing the
LEVEL button. Moreover, performs setting changes and
adjustments for functions selected by pressing the SET MENU
button (
L).
L SET MENU button
Press this button once or more to select the desired function in
the SET MENU mode.
M TUNING DOWN/UP button
Used for tuning. Press the “UP” side to tune in to a higher
frequency, and press the “DOWN” side to tune in to a lower
frequency.
N PROGRAM selector button
Press this button in the or direction to select a digital
sound field processing program.
O EFFECT button
Press this button to turn on and off the output from the center
and rear speakers. The sound becomes normal 2-channel
when this function is turned off.
However, this does not apply to Dolby Digital or DTS. The
signals at all channels will be distributed to the main channels
and output from the main speakers, even if the output from the
center and rear speakers are turned off, when Dolby Digital or
DTS is decoded.
P VIDEO AUX terminals
Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a
camcorder to these terminals. A video unit with a S video
output terminal can be connected to the S VIDEO terminal to
obtain a high resolution picture. The source can be selected
with the INPUT SELECTOR and REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector.
Q INPUT MODE button
Press this button to select how input signals are received from
sources that output two or more types of signals. The “AUTO”,
“DTS” and “ANALOG” modes are available. Refer to page 38
for details.
<China, Singapore and General models only>
The “AUTO”, “D.D.RF”, “DTS”, “DGTL” and “ANALOG” modes
are available for DVD/LD sources.
GETTING STARTED
11
English
Display panel
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DSP
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
SLEEP
ENHANCED MOVIE THEATER 12 TV SPORTS
MONO MOVIE DISCO JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT CHURCH CONCERT HALL
MEMORY
AUTO
0 20 100
STEREO
12 3
45 7 8 0 B
A
SPEAKERS
AB
69
1 indicators
Either “dts” indicators will be illuminated when the built-in DTS
decoder is turned on.
A red “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a compact
disc or laserdisc encoded with DTS.
An orange “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a
DVD encoded with DTS.
An orange “dts” indicator may be illuminated when playing a
laserdisc encoded with DTS after a video-CD or DVD on a
DVD/LD combi-player.
2 Multi-information display
This display shows the current DSP program and the status of
adjustments and setting changes. Several statuses can be
viewed at one time. The current station frequency and band
(AM or FM) will also appear when the tuner source input mode
is selected.
3 Input source indicators
One of the arrows for these indicators will be illuminated
depending on which source is selected.
4 DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators
The DIGITAL indicator will be illuminated when the built-in
Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the source
encoded with Dolby Digital are not 2-channels.
The PRO LOGIC indicator will be illuminated when the
built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on.
5 DSP indicator
This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in digital sound
field processor is on.
6 SPEAKERS A/B indicators
One of these indicators will be illuminated depending on which
main speakers are selected. Both indicators will be illuminated
when both speakers A and B are selected.
7 MEMORY indicator
A flashing MEMORY indicator means a station can be saved,
as explained in the following:
Press the MEMORY button. The MEMORY indicator will flash
about 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, program the
displayed station to memory by using the A/B/C/D/E and the
preset station number selector buttons.
8 DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program will be illuminated in
the following cases.
• When the tuner is selected as the input source.
• When a DSP program parameter is selected or adjusted.
• When the DSP program No. 8, 9 or the subprogram
“Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected.
There is no illumination here when no DSP program is
selected
9 AUTO indicator
This indicator will be illuminated during the automatic tuning
mode.
0 STEREO indicator
This indicator will be illuminated when an FM stereo broadcast
with sufficient signal strength is received.
A Signal-level indicator
This indicator shows the signal level of the received station. If
multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases.
B SLEEP indicator
This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in SLEEP timer
is on.
GETTING STARTED
12
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field
quality with a full five-speaker system setup, using a pair of
main speakers to output main source sounds, a pair of effect
speakers to generate the sound field plus one center speaker
for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a five-
speaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one pair of
effect speakers for the sound field will still provide impressive
ambience and effects, however, and may be a good way to
begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to the five-
speaker system later.
Use of the center dialog speaker is
recommended
When playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic decoded, or
playing back a source which contains center-channel signals
with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are
output from the center channel. Therefore, if you want to
maximize the performance of your Audio/Video home theater
system, it is recommended that you use a center channel
speaker.
If, for some reason, it is not practical to use a center speaker, it
is possible to enjoy the movie without it. Best results, however,
are obtained with the full system.
Use of a subwoofer expands your sound
field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer
is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any
or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the
subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a
source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded. You may wish to
choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active Servo Processing
Subwoofer System, which has its own built-in power amplifier.
Speaker setup
m Speakers and speaker placement
Your full five-speaker system will require two speaker pairs:
the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers) and the
REAR SPEAKERS, plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may
also be using a SUBWOOFER.
The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models
and have enough power handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system.
Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN
SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is
ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce
sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER and REAR
SPEAKERS.
Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the ordinary position.
Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position.
They should be nearly 1.8m above the floor.
Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two
MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker
above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically
shielded speaker.)
If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo
Processing Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is
not so critical because low bass tones are not highly
directional.
m Setting up your speaker system
Main speaker
Center speaker
Rear speaker
Subwoofer
PREPARATION
5 Speaker System
The recommended system for enjoying Audio/Video
sources.
By the use of a center speaker, center channel sounds (dialog,
vocals etc.) are precisely localized.
1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “LRG” or “SML”.
(See page 29.)
4 Speaker System
Basic system.
You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding a pair of
rear speakers to a basic stereo speaker system.
However, center channel sounds must be output from the left
and right main speakers.
1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “NONE”. (See page 29.)
13
English
PREPARATION
m Speaker system configurations
14
Caution: Plug in this unit and other components after all connections are completed.
All connections must be correct, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “” to “”. Also refer to the owner’s manual for
each of your components.
Audio/video source equipment
Use RCA type pin plug cables for audio/video units with the exception described later.
The output (or input) terminals of YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 3, 4, etc. on the rear panel must be connected to
the same-numbered terminals of this unit.
PHONO
VIDEO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
CD
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
GND
GND
OPTICAL
TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DVD/LD
DIGITAL SIGNAL
EXTERNAL
DECODER
INPUT
TAPE/MD
3
4
IN
( PLAY )
OUT
( REC )
MAIN
SUB WOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND
COAXIAL
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
GND
OUTPUT
LINE OUT
LINE IN
(U.S.A. model)
Turntable
MD recorder,
Tape deck, etc.
CD player
m Basic connections of audio units
(*1): GND terminal (For turntable use)
Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND
terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases
better results may be obtained with the ground wire
disconnected.
: Indicates the direction of signals.
Connections
PREPARATION
(*1)
PAL/NTSC switch (China and General models only)
This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL
television formats. Set this switch to the position for the
format your TV monitor employs.
PAL: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the
PAL format.
Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter
which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is
sent from an external video unit to this unit.
NTSC: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the
NTSC format.
Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter
which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is
sent from an external video unit to this unit.
Note
Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same
format that your TV monitor employs, otherwise a picture
will not be played back normally.
15
English
(U.S.A. model)
LD player or
DVD player
TV monitor
PAL/NTSC switch
m Basic connections of video units
Video cassette
recorder 2
Video cassette
recorder 1
TV/Satellite tuner
PREPARATION
VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel)
These terminals are used to connect a video input source such
as a camcorder.
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
S VIDEO
L
R
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT L
AUDIO OUT R
Camcorder
: S-video cable
(Refer to page 20 for details
about the S VIDEO terminal.)
IN OUT
S VIDEO
REMOTE
CONTROL
PAL
NTSC
16
m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals
If your CD player, MD recorder, LD player, DVD player,
TV/satellite tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical
digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to
this unit’s COAXIAL or OPTICAL, or both terminals.
Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog
audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are
necessary, especially for an LD player, a DVD player or a CD
player to send signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to
this unit.
To make an optical digital connection between this unit and an
external unit, remove the cover from each optical terminal, and
then connect them by using a commercially available optical
fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables
might not function correctly.
Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or
COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit
connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals
of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape
deck or VCR connected to only analog audio signal terminals
of this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals
between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 38 for details.)
* However, if you connect an MD recorder or DAT to this
unit’s OPTICAL TAPE/MD IN and OUT terminals, it can
record input sources connected to this unit’s OPTICAL
digital signal input terminals.
PHONO
VIDEO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
CD
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
GND
GND
OPTICAL
TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD
TAPE/MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DVD/LD
DIGITAL SIGNAL
EXTERNAL
DECODER
INPUT
TAPE/MD
3
4
IN
( PLAY )
OUT
( REC )
MAIN
SUB WOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND
COAXIAL
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OUT
MD recorder, DAT,
etc.
CD player
TV/Satellite tunerLD player or DVD player
(U.S.A. model)
PREPARATION
<U.S.A., Canada and Australia models>
: Optical fiber cable
: Coaxial cable
17
English
PREPARATION
Notes
When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital
and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to
both terminals of the same name.
Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals
are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from
dust.
In order to make this unit perform successful DTS-decoding,
the DTS bitstream must not be altered, manipulated or
corrupted in the process of sending the DTS bitstream from
the DIGITAL OUT terminal of an external unit to a digital
signal input terminal of this unit.
Digital audio signals will not be output from the ZONE 2
OUT AUDIO SIGNAL terminals of this unit.
All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the
sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.
: Optical fiber cable
: Coaxial cable
<China, Singapore and General models>
PHONO
VIDEO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
CD
GND
TV/DBSCD
TAPE/MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DVD/LD
EXTERNAL
DECODER
INPUT
TAPE/MD
3
4
IN
( PLAY )
OUT
( REC )
MAIN
SUB WOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
AM
ANT
AM
FM
ANT
FM
GND
CDDVD/LD
STEP
DIGITAL
RF SIGNAL
DIGITAL
FREQUENCY
50kHz 9 kHz
I00kHz I0kHz
DIGITAL SIGNAL
OPTICAL
MD recorder, DAT,
etc.
CD player
TV/Satellite tunerLD player or DVD player
(General model)
18
If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF
signal output terminal, it can be connected to this unit by using
an RF demodulator (separate purchase).
First, connect the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal of
the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the DOLBY DIGITAL RF
signal input terminal of the RF demodulator. Next, connect the
coaxial digital signal output terminal of the RF demodulator to
the COAXIAL digital signal input terminal of this unit.
This connection is necessary for sending audio signals of an
LD source encoded with Dolby Digital to this unit.
It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to
this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the
DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back
a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal
stereo (or monaural).
You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal
of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD
digital signal input terminal of this unit.
This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source
with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD
source with DTS decoded.
When these connections are completed, set the input mode of
the DVD/LD source to “AUTO”, and you will hear sounds
decoded with Dolby Digital even if signals are input to both
COAXIAL and OPTICAL digital signal input terminals of this
unit. This is because signals input to the COAXIAL terminal
take priority over signals input to the OPTICAL terminal.
Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode.
Notes
If, for example, you play a CD on the DVD/LD/CD combi-
player, there is no input to the COAXIAL terminal, so the
signals input to the OPTICAL terminal take priority. In this
case, switch off the RF demodulator to listen to CD sound
without interference. However, if your RF demodulator is the
Yamaha model APD-1, you do not have to switch it off.
When you want to play an LD source encoded with Dolby
Digital without decoding Dolby Digital, you must switch off
the power of the RF demodulator.
PHONO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
1
CD
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
GND
GND
OPTICAL
TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DVD/LD
DIGITAL SIGNAL
EXTERNAL
DECODER
INPUT
TAPE/MD
3
4
IN
( PLAY )
OUT
( REC )
MAIN
SUB WOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
DOLBY DIGITAL
RF IN
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
ANALOG
OUT
DOLBY DIGITAL
RF OUT
DVD/LD/CD
combi-player, etc.
(U.S.A. model)
RF demodulator
m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL RF output of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player
PREPARATION
<For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models>
19
English
PREPARATION
If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF
signal output terminal, connect it to this unit’s DIGITAL RF
SIGNAL input terminal. Audio signals of an LD source encoded
with the Dolby Digital are input to this unit by this connection.
* To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital decoded,
set the input mode of DVD/LD to “AUTO” or “D.D.RF”.
(Refer to page 38 for details.)
It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to
this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the
DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back
a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal
stereo (or monaural).
You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal
of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD
digital signal input terminal of this unit.
This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source
with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD
source with DTS decoded.
Note
DOLBY DIGITAL RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by
a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. To record a source played
back on the DVD/LD/CD combi-player, it must be connected to
the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and analog
audio signal input terminals of this unit.
PHONO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
1
CD
GND
TV/DBSCD
TAPE/MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DVD/LD
EXTERNAL
DECODER
INPUT
TAPE/MD
3
4
IN
( PLAY )
OUT
( REC )
MAIN
SUB WOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT
ANALOG OUT
DOLBY DIGITAL
RF OUT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
OPTICAL
AM
ANT
AM
FM
ANT
FM
GND
CDDVD/LD
STEP
DIGITAL
RF SIGNAL
DIGITAL
FREQUENCY
50kHz 9kHz
I00kHz I0kHz
DVD/LD/CD
combi-player
(General model)
<For China, Singapore and General models>
20
VIDEO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
S-VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
IN
S-VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals
If your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. and your
monitor are equipped with “S” video terminals, connect them to
this unit’s S VIDEO terminals, and connect this unit’s S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video input of your monitor.
With this connection, you can play back and record high quality
pictures. Otherwise, connect the “composite” video terminals
from your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. to the
VIDEO terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO
MONITOR OUT terminal to the “composite” video input of your
monitor.
Note
If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO
input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective
output terminals.
Notes about the Video superimpose
If you watch a video source that is connected to both S
VIDEO and VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of
screen display information are output from only the S
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal.
When no video signal is input to either S VIDEO or VIDEO
input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display
information are output from both S VIDEO MONITOR OUT
and VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals with a color
background.
* For China and General models, if the PAL/NTSC switch
on the rear panel is set to “PAL”, nothing will be output
from either S VIDEO MONITOR OUT or VIDEO
MONITOR OUT terminal in this case.
S VIDEO terminals
This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition
to standard type VIDEO terminals.
S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into
luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison
with S VIDEO terminals, standard type VIDEO terminals
transmit “composite” video signals.
LD player or DVD player
TV/Satellite tuner
Video cassette recorder 1
Video cassette recorder 2
TV monitor
PREPARATION
: S-video cable
21
English
This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal
input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear
surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels) for
inputting signals from an external decoder of a future format to
this unit.
To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these
terminals, press the EXT. DECODER button on the front panel
so that “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display. By doing so,
the signals input to these terminals are sent to the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals and OUTPUT terminals
of this unit.
Notes
When signals input to these terminals are selected, the
digital sound field processor cannot be used.
The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR
SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT”
in the SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input
to these terminals. The setting of “5. MAIN LEVEL” is
effective. (Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details.)
The adjustments of the output level of the center speaker,
rear speakers and subwoofer are effective when the signals
input to these terminals are selected as the input source.
(Refer to pages 50 to 51 for details.)
m
Connecting an external decoder of a future format to this unit
PHONO
VIDEO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
VCR 2
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
1
CD
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
GND
GND
OPTICAL
TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DVD/LD
DIGITAL SIGNAL
TAPE/MD
3
4
IN
( PLAY )
OUT
( REC )
MAIN
SUB WOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND
COAXIAL
S VIDEO
EXTERNAL
DECODER
INPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUT
SURROUND OUT
CENTER
OUT
MAIN OUT
External decoder
(U.S.A. model)
PREPARATION
22
Speakers
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING.
CAUTION
CENTER
REAR
IN OUT
OUTPUT
A
B
A
B
REAR
MAIN
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
( SURROUND )
( SURROUND )
REMOTE
CONTROL
MAIN
CENTER
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
CENTER : 4
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 4
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
CENTER : 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
:
I
6
MIN. / SPEAKER
SET BEFORE POWER ON
SPEAKERS
Center speaker
Left
(U.S.A. model)
Right
Main speakers A
Rear speakers
Subwoofer system
Left
Right
Left
Right
Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear of this unit.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Loosen the knob.
Insert the bare wire.
[Remove approx. 5mm
(1/4”) insulation from
the speaker wires.]
Tighten the knob and
secure the wire.
<Except Singapore model>
Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the
Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal.
1
2
3
How to Connect:
Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with the wire of the proper gauge (keep as short as possible). If the
connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct. That is
the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.
Caution
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit or the
speakers, or both.
PREPARATION
Main speakers B
23
English
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this
unit may be damaged.
IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE
STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED:
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to
either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit
is in the standby mode.
Select the position whose requirements your speaker system
meets.
(Upper position)
Center:
<U.S.A. and Canada models>
The impedance of the speaker must be 4or
higher.
<Australia, China, Singapore and General
models
>
The impedance of the speaker must be 6or
higher.
Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6or
higher.
Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance
of each speaker must be 4or higher.
If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance
of each speaker must be 8or higher.
(Lower position)
Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8or higher.
Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8or
higher.
Main:
<Except Canada model>
If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance
of each speaker must be 8or higher.
If you use two pairs of main speakers, the
impedance of each speaker must be 16or higher.
<For Canada model only>
The impedance of each speaker must be 8or
higher.
m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
SPEAKERS
A
B
REAR
SWITCHED
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
60Hz
I00W
CENTER : 4
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 4
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
CENTER : 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
:
I
6
MIN. / SPEAKER
SET BEFORE POWER ON
( SURROUND )
CENTER
MAX.TOTAL
I20V
(U.S.A. model)
IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR
Note on main speaker connections:
One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If
you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the
SPEAKERS A or B terminals.
Note on a subwoofer connection:
You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies
or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when
reproducing discrete signals.
When using a subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER terminal
of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier,
and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier
to the subwoofer.
With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo
Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer
are in the same unit. Such a subwoofer needs only the
connection between the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit
and the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer.
(Refer to page 24 for details about the SUBWOOFER
terminal.)
PREPARATION
24
The speaker connections described on page 22 are fine for
most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to
drive main, center and/or rear speakers with your existing
amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for
connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit.
1 MAIN terminals
These terminals are for main channel line output.
If you drive main speakers with an external stereo power
amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external
amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a
receiver) to these terminals.
There is no connection to these terminals when you use
the built-in amplifier.
* Output signals from the MAIN terminals are affected by
the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, BASS
EXTENSION button and the TONE BYPASS button.
2 SUBWOOFER terminal
When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to
this terminal. Low frequencies distributed from the main,
center and/or rear channels are output from this terminal.
(The cut-off frequency of this terminal is 90 Hz.) Signals
of LFE (low frequency effect) generated when Dolby
Digital or DTS is decoded are also output if they are
assigned to this terminal.
3 CENTER terminal
This terminal is for center channel line output.
If you drive a center speaker with an external power
amplifier, connect the input terminal of the external
amplifier to this terminal.
There is no connection to this terminal when you use the
built-in amplifier.
4 REAR (SURROUND) terminals
These terminals are for rear channel line output.
If you drive rear speakers with an external stereo power
amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external
amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a
receiver) to these terminals.
There is no connection to these terminals when you use
the built-in amplifier.
Notes
Output level of signals from all of these terminals are
adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel
or MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote controller.
If an external power amplifier is connected to the MAIN,
CENTER or REAR output terminals, do not use the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals (MAIN, CENTER or
REAR).
m To drive main, center and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers
SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CAUTION
CENTER
REAR
IN OUT
OUTPUT
A
B
MAIN
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
( SURROUND )
REMOTE
CONTROL
MAIN
CEN
1
42
3
PREPARATION
25
English
Antennas
Each antenna should be connected to the designated terminals correctly, as shown in the following figure.
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal
strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality only with the indoor antennas, the use of an outdoor antenna may result in improvement.
PHONO
1
CD
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
GND
GND
CDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL SIGNAL
EXTERNAL
DECODER
INPUT
TAPE/MD
3
4
IN
( PLAY )
OUT
( REC )
MAIN
SUB WOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND
COAXIAL
Outdoor FM antenna
Outdoor AM antenna
AM loop
antenna
(included)
Ground
75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter
75-ohm coaxial cable
300-ohm flat
ribbon cable
Indoor FM
antenna
(included)
m Connecting the AM loop antenna
1.Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole.
2.Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and
GND terminals.
3.Return the tab back to the original position to lock the lead
wires. Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good
connection.
4.Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.
5.Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is
obtained.
Notes
The AM loop antenna should be placed apart from the main
unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall.
The AM loop antenna should be kept connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
1
3
2
PREPARATION
(U.S.A. model)
75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter
Antenna stand
Loop antenna
26
m Connecting the indoor FM antenna
Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75UNBAL. FM
ANT terminal.
Note
Do not use an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM
antenna at the same time.
GND terminal
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect
the GND terminal to a good ground. A good ground is a
metal stake driven into moist earth.
m Optional outdoor FM antenna
Consult your dealer or authorized service center about the best
method of selecting and erecting an outdoor FM antenna.
The choice of the flat ribbon cable is also important. Flat ribbon
cable performs well electrically, and is cheaper and somewhat
easier to handle when routing it through windows and around
rooms. Coaxial cable is more expensive, does a much better
job of minimizing interference, is less prone to the effects of
weather and close-by metal objects, and is nearly as good a
signal conductor as flat ribbon cable. Coaxial cable is
somewhat more difficult to install at the point where the cable
enters the building. If coaxial cable is selected, make sure the
antenna is designed to be used with this type of cable.
* Use a 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (not included) or a
75-ohm antenna adapter (not included) for connections.
300-ohm flat ribbon cable 75-ohm coaxial cable
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
Notes for FM antenna installation
To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise,
locate the antenna as far from heavy traffic as possible.
Keep the flat ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as
possible. Do not bundle or roll up an excess of the cable.
The antenna should be at least two meters (6.6 feet) from
reinforced concrete walls or metal structures.
300-ohm flat
ribbon cable
75-ohm coaxial
cable
75-ohm antenna
adapter
75-ohm coaxial
cable
m Optional outdoor AM antenna
If this unit is placed in steel buildings or an area far from
broadcasting stations, it may be necessary to install an outside
long wire antenna.
PREPARATION
27
English
After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord
into an AC outlet.
Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is
not to be used for a long period of time.
AL FOR CORRECT SETTING.
SPEAKERS
A
B
REAR
SWITCHED
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
I00W
CENTER : 6
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 4
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
CENTER : 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
MAIN
A OR B
: 8
MIN. / SPEAKER
A B
:
I
6
MIN. / SPEAKER
SET BEFORE POWER ON
( SURROUND )
NTER
MAX. TOTAL
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
To AC outlet
(General model)
Plugging in this unit
AC OUTLET(S)
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models)
.......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS
(Australia model).................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET
Use these to connect the power cords of your components to
this unit.
The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s
STANDBY/ON switch or the remote controller’s SYSTEM
POWER ON and STANDBY keys. These outlets will supply
power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on.
The maximum power (total power consumption of components)
that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is
100W.
Voltage Selector (China and General Models
only)
The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be
set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the
AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
PREPARATION
(*1): (*2):
(*1)
(*2)
28
PREPARATION
If you connect your VCR, LD player, video monitor, etc. to this
unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s capability to display
program titles, parameter data and information for various
setting changes and adjustments on your video monitor
screen. This information will be superimposed over the video
image.
If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the
information will be displayed over a blue colored background.
Note: The program titles, parameter data and other
information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit.
Selecting a type of display
You can change the type of display showing various
information on the monitor screen by pressing the ON
SCREEN display key on the remote controller.
Press this key to change the screen to a full or simple display,
or no display at all.
(Example)
Full display
Simple display
Goes off after being displayed for
several seconds.
Notes
When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET
MENU mode, or adjusting the speaker balance by using the
test tone, information is fully displayed on the monitor
screen even if another type of display is currently selected.
Information displayed on the monitor screen in this way
cannot be recorded by a VCR.
A
B
C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
ON SCREEN
On screen display
29
English
PREPARATION
1. CENTER SPEAKER
Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE
Preset position: LRG
LRG: When your center speaker is approximately the same
size as the main speakers.
SML: When you use a center speaker that is smaller than
the main speakers.
In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the
center channel are output from the SUBWOOFER
terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position
is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”).
NONE: When you do not have a center speaker.
The center channel sound will be output from the left
and right main speakers.
2. REAR SPEAKER
Choices: LARGE/SMALL
Preset position: LARGE
LARGE: If your rear speakers have a high ability for bass
reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear
speaker in parallel.
In this position, full range signals are output from the
rear speakers.
SMALL: If your rear speakers do not have a high ability for
bass reproduction.
In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the
rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER
terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position
is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”).
The following functions control the output signals to the speakers in your audio system. When speaker connections are all
completed, select a proper position on each function to maximize the performance of your speaker system.
* For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 56 to 59.
1. CENTER SPEAKER
2. REAR SPEAKER
3. MAIN SPEAKER
4. LFE/BASS OUT
5. MAIN LEVEL
m Function description
Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU”mode)
30
PREPARATION
3. MAIN SPEAKER
Choices: LARGE/SMALL
Preset position: LARGE
LARGE: If your main speakers have a high ability for bass
reproduction.
In this position, full range signals present at the main
channels are output from the main speakers.
SMALL: If your main speakers do not have a high ability for
bass reproduction. However, if your system does not
include a subwoofer, do not select this position.
In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the
main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER
terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on
“4. LFE/BASS OUT”).
4. LFE/BASS OUT
Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH
Preset position: SW
MAIN: If your system does not include a subwoofer.
In this position, full range signals present at the main
channels, signals from the LFE channel and other
low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER
SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed
from other channels are output from the main
speakers.
SW/BOTH:
Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system
includes a subwoofer.
In either position, signals at LFE channel and other
low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER
SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed
from other channels are output from the
SUBWOOFER terminals.
When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN
SPEAKER”, in the SW position, no signal is
distributed from the main channels to the
SUBWOOFER terminals, however in the BOTH
position, low bass signals from the main channels
are output to both of the main speakers and the
SUBWOOFER terminals.
5. MAIN LEVEL
Choices: Normal/–10dB
Preset position: Normal
Normal: Normally, select this position.
–10dB: If the volume levels to the center and/or rear
speakers are lower than the level to the main
speakers even though they are adjusted to
maximum.
The volume level to the main speakers are
decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker
output level balance properly.
Note
The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR
SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT”
have no effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL
DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit.
Remote control
31
English
m Changing selections
Refer to the display panel or the monitor screen when changing the selections.
When using the remote controller, set the
PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU
position.
Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.
1 Turn on the power of this unit. (If necessary, turn on the
power of the monitor to display information.)
2 Select the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” by using
one of the following methods.
3 Use one of the buttons figured below to select the
desired position.
4 Follow the same procedure for “2. REAR SPEAKER”,
“3. MAIN SPEAKER”, “4. LFE/BASS OUT” and/or
“5. MAIN LEVEL”.
First select the function by following step 2, and then
select the proper position by following step 3.
Front panel
Remote control
STANDBY/ON
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SPEAKERS
A
CD
TUNER
PHONO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
EXT. DEC.
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
1
1
Set to
“SET MENU”.
2, 3
Remote control
Remote control
or
SYSTEM
POWER ON
PREPARATION
Front panel
LEVEL
SET
MENU
Press once
or more.
SPEAKERS
A
CD
TUNER
PHONO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
Changes.
Front panel
LEVEL
SET
MENU
or
2
3
Press once
or more.
32
1
Set to the “
” position.
2 Turn on the power.
3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding
indicator will be illuminated.
* Both speakers A and B can be selected.
4
Set to the “0” position.
5
Set to the “OFF ( )”.
6 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the
remote controller to the PARAMETER position.
7 Press the TEST key on the remote controller to enter
the test mode.
This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test
tone generator. After the adjustments, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker.
This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic
Surround decoder and the DTS decoder.
The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote controller.
Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
VOLUME
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
STANDBY/ON
1
2
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
53 4
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
V-AUX
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
2
TEST
Front panel
Front panel
Front panel
Front panel
Front panel
7
6
Remote control
Remote control
Remote control
SYSTEM
POWER ON
or
CONTINUED
PARAMETER
SET MENU
Speaker balance adjustment
PREPARATION
SPEAKERS
AB
33
English
8 Turn up the volume.
You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main
speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main
speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear
speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes
as shown below.
* The state of the test tone output is also shown on the
monitor screen by an image of the audio listening room.
This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.
* If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU
mode is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the
center channel test tone from the left and right main
speakers.
9 Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound
output level of the left main speaker and the right main
speaker are the same.
10 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker
and the rear speakers so that they become almost
the same as the main speakers.
How to adjust:
Pressing the + or – key adjusts the level to the speaker
(except the main speakers) currently outputting the test
tone.
* Pressing the + key raises and the key lowers the
level.
* While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected
speaker.
If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test
tone by pressing the or key once or more so that
“CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the
display.
* While holding the or key pressed, the test tone
is fixed on the selected speaker.
* “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected,
“R SUR.” shows the right rear speaker, and “L SUR.”
shows the left rear speaker.
* The output level of the selected speaker can be
adjusted by the + or – key.
MUTE
BALANCE
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
Remote control
Front panel
Remote control
Remote control
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
EFFECT
ON/OFF
THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
10
8
9
CONTINUED
PREPARATION
Main (L)
Main (R)
Center
Rear (L)
Rear (R)
TEST DOLBY SUR.
EFFECT LEVEL
CENTER 2dB
+
34
11 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST
key once again to cancel the test tone.
Notes
Once you have completed these adjustments, you can
adjust the sound level on your audio system by using the
VOLUME control (or the MASTER VOLUME keys on the
remote controller) only.
If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use
their volume controls to obtain proper balance.
If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU
mode is set in the “NONE” position, in step 10, the sound
output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.
This is because in this mode, the center sound is
automatically output from the left and right main speakers.
If there is insufficient sound output from the center and
rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker
output level by setting the function “5. MAIN LEVEL” in
the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position.
Remote control
Disappears.
TEST
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
11
PREPARATION
35
English
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
1
Set to the “
” position.
2 Turn on the power.
3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding
indicator will be illuminated.
Front panel
* Both speakers A and B can be selected.
4 Select an input source.
(For video sources, turn on the TV/monitor.)
The selected source is shown on the display panel and
the monitor screen.
Name of the selected input source
To select the source connected to the EXTERNAL
DECODER INPUT terminals, press the EXT. DECODER
button. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the
display. (Refer to page 37 for details.)
VOLUME
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
STANDBY/ON
1
2
4
4
3
Front panel
or
Remote control
DVD/LD
SPEAKERS
A
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
A/B
REC/PAUSE
BA
A
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
B
DVD/LD
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 2
C
DIR
DISCSTOP
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
Front panel
Front panel
2
Remote control
SYSTEM
POWER ON
or
BASIC OPERATION
Playing a source
SPEAKERS
AB
CONTINUED
36
BASIC OPERATION
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
75
5
7
8
TAPE/MD
A/B
REC/PAUSE
BA
A
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
B
DVD/LD
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 2
C
DIR
DISCSTOP
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
8
5 The current input mode is also shown for a source that
inputs two or more types of signals to this unit.
To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE button
on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently
selected source on the remote controller. (Refer to page 38
for details on switching the input mode.)
6 Play the source. (Refer to page 43 for details on
tuning.)
7
Adjust the output level.
8 Adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, etc.
(Refer to page 42) and use the digital
sound field processor. (Refer to pages 47–49.)
Front panel
or
Remote control
Input mode
INPUT MODE
DVD/LD
SPEAKERS
A
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
PHONO
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
Front panel
or
Remote control
VOLUME
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
MASTER VOLUME
MUTE
8
37
English
When you finish using this unit
Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel or the
STANDBY key on the remote controller to enter the standby
mode.
To select the source connected to this unit’s
EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as
the input source.
Press the EXT. DECODER button. “EXT. DECODER” will
appear on the display.
Note
The input source selected in this way has priority over any
other input source already selected.
To select another input source, press the EXT. DECODER
button again so that “EXT. DECODER” goes off from the
display, and then use the INPUT SELECTOR.
Notes on input source selection
Note that selecting an input source means that the source
which is connected to the corresponding input terminals on
the rear panel is selected.
* To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX
terminals on the front panel, select “V-AUX”.
The setting of the EXT. DECODER button cannot be
canceled by selecting another input source. To cancel it,
press the EXT. DECODER button again so that “EXT.
DECODER” goes off from the display.
If you select a video input source without canceling the
setting of the EXT. DECODER button, you will see the
picture of the video input source and hear the sound of the
source selected by the EXT. DECODER button.
If a different audio source is selected with the input selector
keys on the remote controller while enjoying a video source,
the sound from the newly selected audio source is heard,
but the picture from the video source can still be seen.
When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the
state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the
same input source was last selected will be automatically
recalled.
If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit
playing back a source is not operating correctly, “INPUT
DATA ERR” appears on the display.
Front panel
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
Front panel
Remote control
STANDBY
or
Remote control
EXT. DEC.
or
BASIC OPERATION
38
v For CD, TAPE/MD and TV/DBS sources:
The following three input modes are provided.
AUTO:
This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the
power of this unit.
In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the
following order of priority.
1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal
digital input signals (PCM)
2. Analog input signal (ANALOG)
* For a CD source, if digital signals are input from both of the
OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from
the COAXIAL terminal is selected.
DTS:
In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is
selected even though other signals are input at the same time.
ANALOG
In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even
though digital signals are input at the same time.
Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals
instead of digital input signals.
v For DVD/LD source:
The following five input modes are provided.
AUTO:
This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the
power to this unit.
In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected by the
following order of priority.
1. Dolby Digital RF signal (DOLBY DIGITAL)
2. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal
digital input signals (PCM)
3. Analog input signal (ANALOG)
D.D.RF:
In this mode, only Dolby Digital RF signal is selected.
DTS:
In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are
selected even though other signals are input at the same time.
DGTL:
In this mode, only digital input signals (DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS
or PCM) are selected even though other types of signals are
input at the same time.
ANALOG
In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even
though other types of signals are input at the same time.
BASIC OPERATION
AUTO:
This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the
power of this unit.
In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the
following order of priority.
1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal
digital input signals (PCM)
2. Analog input signal (ANALOG)
* For CD and DVD/LD sources, if digital signals are input
from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the
digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected.
DTS:
In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is
selected even though other signals are input at the same time.
ANALOG
In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even
though digital signals are input at the same time.
Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals
instead of digital input signals.
m Switching the input mode
This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit.
<
China, Singapore and General models
>
<
U.S.A., Canada and Australia models
>
The following three input modes are provided.
Notes on input mode selection
The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with
function “12. TV/DBS INPUT” in the SET MENU mode.
This unit will be automatically set to the selected input mode
when the power is turned on.
Set the input mode to the following mode to play a DVD/LD
source encoded with Dolby Digital.
U.S.A., Canada and Australia models: AUTO
China, Singapore and General models: AUTO or D.D.RF
Select the ANALOG mode to play a normal 2-channel
source with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program.
The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD
players in the following situation:
The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while
playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, then
disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for
a moment because the digital input signal was selected
again.
The input mode cannot be changed for PHONO, TUNER,
VCR 1, VCR 2 and VIDEO AUX sources because only
analog signals are used.
The present input mode appears on the front display and
monitor screen when the input source is changed to
DVD/LD, CD, TAPE/MD or TV/DBS, or the input mode is
changed.
The present input signal is also shown on the monitor
screen when the input mode is changed to AUTO, as shown
below.
* However, the present input signal will not be shown when
the input mode is switched during the speaker test mode.
Only AUTO will be displayed.
Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS
Select the DTS mode when playing an LD or CD source
encoded with DTS. (Red “dts” indicator is illuminated on
the display panel.) If the “AUTO” mode is selected, a
noise may be heard just after playback begins.
Do not play these sources in the ANALOG mode
because only background noise will be output from the
speakers.
This unit is automatically locked in the DTS decoding
mode when playing a CD or LD source encoded with
DTS in the AUTO mode to prevent background noise in
future operation. The red “dts” indicator will be flashing.
In this mode, no sound will be heard if a disc with normal
digital signals (PCM) is played from a CD or LD source.
To play back the disc normally, press the INPUT MODE
button on the front panel, or, the input selector key for the
current source on the remote controller.
39
English
BASIC OPERATION
40
1 Set the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector to the SOURCE
position.
2 Select the source you want to record.
3 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up
to confirm the input source. (Refer to page 43 for
details on tuning.)
4 Begin recording to the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)
or VCR connected to this unit.
3
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
2
Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller.
Front panel
Front panel
or
Remote control
CD
2
3
TAPE/MD
A/B
REC/PAUSE
BA
A
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
B
DVD/LD
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 2
C
DIR
DISCSTOP
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
Front panel
or
Remote control
VOLUME
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
MASTER VOLUME
MUTE
1
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD)
to tape (or MD)
m Recording the playing source to tape (or MD)
BASIC OPERATION
41
English
m Recording a source to tape (or MD) while listening to (or watching) another
source
The source (except for “SOURCE”) that is selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector can be recorded to a tape deck (MD
recorder) and/or VCR, regardless of the INPUT SELECTOR setting.
1 Select the source you want to record.
2 Play the source.
3 Select the source with the INPUT SELECTOR and
adjust the VOLUME control to check the sound output.
4 Begin recording on the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)
or VCR.
5 The sound and/or picture of the recording can be
monitored by selecting the tape deck (or VCR) with the
INPUT SELECTOR.
6 Selecting another source to enjoy with the INPUT
SELECTOR will not effect the recording.
Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller.
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
Front panel
or
Remote control
CD
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
Front panel
or
or
Remote control
VOLUME
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
MASTER VOLUME
MUTE
TAPE/MD
3
1
3, 5, 6
3, 5, 6
3
TAPE/MD
A/B
REC/PAUSE
BA
A
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
B
DVD/LD
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 2
C
DIR
DISCSTOP
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
BASIC OPERATION
42
Notes on recording
The VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, the
BASS EXTENSION button and the settings of DSP have
no effect on the material being recorded.
Composite video and S video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected
to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal,
you can record only a S video (or only a composite video)
signal on your VCR.
A source that is connected to this unit between optical
digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or
VCR other than the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)
connected to the OPTICAL TAPE/MD OUT terminal of this
unit.
A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER
INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded.
Please check the copyright laws in your country to record
from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of
copyright material may infringe on copyright laws.
<For China, Singapore and General models only>
Dolby Digital RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a
tape deck or VCR. To record an LD source, the LD player
must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal
input terminal and/or analog audio signal input terminals of
this unit.
If you play back a video source that uses scramble or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may
be a case that display information superimposed on the
picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to those
signals.
BASIC OPERATION
m Adjusting the BALANCE control
Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right
speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by
speaker location or listening room conditions.
Note
This control is effective only for the sound from the main
speakers.
m Using the BASS EXTENSION
button
Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency
response at the main left and right channels while maintaining
overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing
the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used.
m Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE
controls
BASS : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter-
clockwise to decrease) the low frequency
response.
TREBLE : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter
clockwise to decrease) the high frequency response.
Note
These controls are effective only for the sound from the main
speakers.
m Using the TONE BYPASS button
Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and
TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting
pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone
control circuitry can be used when this button is released
outward (OFF).
BASS TREBLE
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
BALANCE
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
Sound control
43
English
Tuning
BASIC OPERATION
1 Select “TUNER” as the input source.
2 Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be
illuminated.
3
4 Tune to the desired station manually.
* Hold down the button to continue the tuning search.
1 Select “TUNER” as the input source.
2 Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be
illuminated.
3
4 Press the “UP” side once to tune in to a higher
frequency.
Press the “DOWN” side once to tune in to a lower
frequency.
* Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at
the correct station.
* Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the
correct station because the signals are weak.
Quick automatic-search tuning (automatic tuning) is effective when the station signals are strong with no interference. However,
manual tuning can be used during less-than-ideal conditions.
Note
Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the
reception to monaural to increase the signal quality.
m Automatic tuning m Manual tuning
FM
/
AM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO
/
MAN’L MONO
TUNING
MODE
AUTO
/
MAN’L MONO
DOWN
TUNING
UP
DOWN
TUNING
UP
Turn the “AUTO”
indicator off.
2
1
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
34
or
FM
/
AM
or
AUTO
Basic operation
44
BASIC OPERATION
1 Tune to a station.
(Refer to the previous page for the tuning procedure.)
2 Select a group (A – E) of preset stations.
3
4 Select a preset station number (1 to 8) where you want
to program the station before the “MEMORY” indicator
goes off from the display.
* In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8.
* You can program more stations to the preset station
numbers on other groups in the same way by selecting
other groups in step 2.
11 Select the group of preset stations.
22 Select the preset station number.
Notes
A new setting can be programmed in place of the former
one.
For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or
monaural) is stored along with the station frequency.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed data
from being lost even if this unit is set to the standby mode or
the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the
power is cut due to a temporary power failure. If, however, the
power is cut for about two weeks, the memory may be
deleted. If so, it can be re-programmed by simply following
the Preset tuning steps.
m Manual preset tuning
This unit can store station frequencies selected by the tuning operation. With this function, you can recall any desired station only by
selecting the preset station number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored.
To store stations
2, 11 3
MAN’L
/
AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
Flashes on and off
for about 5 seconds.
SPEAKERS
A
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
AUTO
0 20 100
STEREO
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A1.
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
Preset tuning
To recall a preset station
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4, 22
45
English
1
2 Press and hold for more than 3 seconds
3
To tune to higher frequencies, press the “UP” side once.
To tune to lower frequencies, press the “DOWN” side once.
* If the TUNING button is not pressed, in a while, the
automatic preset tuning begins automatically toward higher
frequencies.
The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency
currently displayed. Received stations are programmed to
A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially.
* If more than 8 stations are received, they are also
programmed to the preset station numbers on other groups
(B, C, D and E) in that order.
If you want to store the first received station to the
desired preset station number.
If, for example, you want to store the first received station to
C5, select “C5” by using the A/B/C/D/E button and the preset
station number selector buttons after pressing the MEMORY
button in step 2. Then press the TUNING button. The first
received station is stored to C5, and next stations to C6, C7 ...
sequentially.
If stations are stored up to E8, the automatic preset tuning is
finished automatically.
When the automatic preset tuning is finished
The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.
Check the contents and the number of preset stations by
following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset
station” on page 44.
To recall a preset station
Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset
station” on page 44.
A recalled station is shown by the frequency on the display.
Notes
You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM
station manually by simply following the procedure of the
section “To store stations” on page 44.
If the number of received stations is not enough to be stored
up to E8, the search will be finished automatically after
searching all frequencies.
With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal
strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to
program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural
manually and program it by following the procedure of the
section “To store stations” on page 44.
m Automatic preset tuning
You can make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations. With this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and
stores FM stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual
preset tuning method on page 44.
To store stations
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
DOWN
TUNING
UP
BASIC OPERATION
Flashes
MAN’L
/
AUTO FM
MEMORY
FM
/
AM
21
3
SPEAKERS
A
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
MEMORY
AUTO
0 20 100
STEREO
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
46
BASIC OPERATION
m Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below.
Example)
If you want to exchange the preset stations on E1 and A5 with
each other.
1 Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the
method of “To recall a preset station” on page 44).
2
3 Recall the preset station on A5 by following the same
method with step 1.
4
Shows the exchange of stations is completed.
2, 4
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
SPEAKERS
A
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
MEMORY
0 20 100
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
Flashes.
Flashes.
EDIT
MEMORY
MEMORY
EDIT
47
English
Using digital sound field processor (DSP)
Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP)
B
DVD/LD
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 2
C
DISCSTOP
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand
and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your
listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend
on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments.
In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound
reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded
with DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined
operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic Surround or DTS.
This unit has 10 programs for digital sound field processing; 5 programs for Audio sources and 5 programs for Audio/Video sources.
In addition, some programs have two subprograms. All programs contain parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste.
For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 52 to 55.
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “Playing a source” on pages 35 to 36.
2 When operating on the front panel:
If no program name is illuminated on the display panel,
press the EFFECT button to turn on the digital sound
field processor so that a name of a DSP program
appears on the display panel and the monitor screen.
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
2
2
When operating on the remote controller:
Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the
PARAMETER position.
Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.
PARAMETER
SET MENU
CONTINUED
EFFECT
BASIC OPERATION
48
3 Select a program that is suitable for the source.
The name of the selected program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen.
4
A
djust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 50 and 51.)
You can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 60 to 64.)
Notes
Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected
at this time. So, when you select the same input source the next time, the same program will be automatically recalled.
If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround
sound effect.
When a monaural sound source is played with the program PRO LOGIC (Normal/Enhanced), a proper effect will not be
obtained. Moreover, sound may become unnatural depending on the settings of the speaker output modes (1. CENTER
SPEAKER to 4. LFE/BASS OUT) in the SET MENU mode.
When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is
considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels
may produce an unnatural effect.
When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used
and the EFFECT button also will not function.
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
Press once or more.
a)
b) For the programs No. 8, 9 and 10 only, you can select
the desired subprogram by pressing the
corresponding DSP program selector key once or
more.
PROGRAM
DVD/LD
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 2
C
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VO UME
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
3
3
3
When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller:
BASIC OPERATION
DSP
SPEAKERS
A
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
MOVIE THEATER 1
Subprogram name Program name
DSP
SPEAKERS
A
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
Program name
49
English
m To enjoy a video source encoded
with Dolby Pro Logic Surround,
Dolby Digital or DTS
When you select the program No. 8, 9 or 10, and the input
signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic
Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the
input signal of the source is encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital is automatically decoded.
When some program is selected and the input signal of the
source is encoded with DTS, DTS is automatically decoded.
The following indicators on the display panel show you what
sound processing is being made.
1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with DTS is played
back and DTS is decoded.
2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with
DTS is played back and DTS is decoded.
3 Lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the
signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is
not in 2-channels.
4 Lights up when Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being
decoded.
5 Lights up when Digital Sound Field Processor is turned
on.
The display panel or the monitor screen will show the selected
subprogram according to the type of the decoding.
Notes
Dolby Digital will not be decoded if the source that is not
encoded with Dolby Digital.
DTS will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded
with DTS.
If the input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital
are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them is
similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals.
<For China, Singapore and General models only>
The indicator 3 will also light up when the input mode is set
to “D.D.RF” even if no signal encoded with Dolby Digital is
input to this unit.
Note
If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS
decoded to another disc not encoded with DTS when the red
“dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly selected
disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts” indicator
flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-decoding
mode.
To play back the disc normally, change the current DTS-
decoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector
key on the remote controller or the INPUT MODE button on
the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns off.
m To cancel the effect sound
The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFFECT ON/OFF
key on the remote controller make it simple to compare the
normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound.
To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound,
press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press
the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time
to restore the effect sound.
Notes
If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with
Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, signals of all
channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers.
If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is pressed
to turn effect sounds off when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoded, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not
output normally depending on a source. In that case, press the
EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key to turn effect
sounds ON, or use input signals not encoded with Dolby
Digital or DTS.
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DSP
DIGITAL SOURCE
AC 3 DTS PCM
1
3
2
4
5
Front panel
or
Remote control
EFFECT
EFFECT
ON/OFF
BASIC OPERATION
50
Speakers
CENTER
RIGHT SURROUND (R SUR.)
LEFT SURROUND (L SUR.)
SUBWOOFER (SWFR)
Preset value
0
0
0
0
Control range (dB)
MIN, –20 to +10
MIN, –20 to +10
MIN, –20 to +10
MIN, –20 to 0
Notes
Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the
same in all the digital sound field programs.
The value of each speaker output level you set the last time
will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby
mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected for more than
one week, these values will be automatically changed to the
factory default settings.
If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU
mode is set in the “NONE” position, the center speaker
output level cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this
mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left
and right main speakers.
When one of the DSP programs No. 1 to 5 is selected, the
center speaker output level cannot be adjusted.
Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and
subwoofer
You can adjust the sound output level of the each speaker
even if the output level is already set in “Speaker balance
adjustment” on pages 32 to 34.
BASIC OPERATION
CENTER
R SUR.
L SUR.
SWFR
(Center speaker output level)
(Right rear speaker output level)
(Left rear speaker output level)
(Subwoofer output level)
51
English
BASIC OPERATION
1 Select the speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust by using one of the following methods.
When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller:
Press a button repeatedly until the name of the desired speaker(s) appears on the display.
2 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s).
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make adjustments on the other speaker(s).
LEVEL
LEVEL
m Method of adjustment
Press once
or more.
Press once
or more.
Press once
or more.
Press once.
EXT. DEC.
EFFECT
ON/OFF
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
SYSTEM
POWER ON
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
LEVEL
SET
MENU
LEVEL
SET
MENU
Set to
“PARAMETER.”
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
21
1
1, 2
When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switich to the PARAMETER position.
Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.
52
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of
these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual
locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment.
Note
The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are
listening in. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments.
m Program No. 1 to 5: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources)
When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )
Speaker output: main, rear
When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( )
Speaker output: main, center, rear
When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )
Speaker output: main, center, rear
DSP
DSP
DIGITAL
DSP
Brief overview of digital sound field programs
BASIC OPERATION
FEATURE
In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the
main speakers, creating an expansive large hall ambience.
Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big
church with a high pointed dome and columns along the sides.
This interior produces very long reverberations.
This is a small, cozy jazz club with a low ceiling. The sound is
very close and intimate.
This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will
experience a very dynamic or lively sound field.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively
disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and
highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy,
“immediate” sound.
PROGRAM
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
DISCO
No.
1
2
3
4
5
53
English
m Program No. 6 to 10: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video sources)
These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder.
Speaker output: main, center, rear
Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from
the center speaker(s).
For program No. 6 and 7 only, indicators light up as follows.
When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )
When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( )
When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )
DSP
DSP
DIGITAL
DSP
BASIC OPERATION
FEATURE
This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the
sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear
surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This
program is the most suitable for sports programs.
This program is designed specifically to enhance mono
source programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the
sound image created in this mode is wider and slightly
forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the
overall sound. It is particularly effective when used with old
mono movies, news broadcasts and dialog.
PROGRAM
TV SPORTS
MONO MOVIE
No.
6
7
54
FEATURE
Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie
theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in
detail, giving both the video and the sound field
incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded
with Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale
movie productions) are ideal for use with this program.
Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest
sound design of science fiction films, thus creating a
broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence.
You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space
sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
and DTS-encoded software employing the most
advanced techniques.
Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the
newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be
similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the
reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as
much as possible. The data of the sound field of an
opera house are used for the front presence side, so the
three dimensional feeling of the sound field is
emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the
screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert
hall on the rear surround side, powerful reverberations
are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure
movies, etc. with much presence.
This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track
film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound
field. The front presence side of the sound field is
relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and
toward the screen, restraining echo effect of
conversations without losing clarity. For the surround
side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully
in a wide space at the rear of the sound field.
No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)
8 MOVIE 70 mm Spectacle
THEATER 1 ()
Functions when the input signal is analog
or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby
Digital in 2 channels.
DGTL Spectacle
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.
DTS Spectacle
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with DTS.
70 mm Sci-Fi
()
Functions when the input signal is analog
or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby
Digital in 2 channels.
DGTL Sci-Fi
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.
DTS Sci-Fi
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with DTS.
9 MOVIE 70 mm Adventure
THEATER 2 ()
Functions when the input signal is analog
or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby
Digital in 2 channels.
DGTL Adventure
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.
DTS Adventure
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with DTS.
70 mm General
()
Functions when the input signal is analog
or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby
Digital in 2 channels.
DGTL General
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.
DTS General
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with DTS.
DSP
DSP
DIGITAL
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DSP
DSP
DIGITAL
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DSP
DSP
DIGITAL
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DSP
DSP
DIGITAL
DSP
PRO LOGIC
Program No. 8 to 9 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby
Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).
BASIC OPERATION
55
English
FEATURE
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby
Digital decoder or the DTS decoder precisely reproduces
sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with Dolby
Surround or DTS. The realization of a highly efficient
decoding process improves crosstalk and channel
separation and makes sound positioning smoother and
more precise.
Ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of
the newest film theater. The digital sound field processing
and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS decoding
are precisely performed without altering the originally
designed sound orientation. The surround effects
produced by this sound field fold the viewer naturally from
the rear to the left and right and toward the screen.
No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)
10 /DTS PRO LOGIC/Normal ()
SURROUND Functions when the input signal is analog
or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby
Digital in 2 channels.
DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.
DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal ()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with DTS.
PRO LOGIC/Enhanced
()
Functions when the input signal is analog
or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby
Digital in 2 channels.
DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.
DTS DIGITAL SUR./Enhanced
()
Functions when the input signal is encoded
with DTS.
DSP
DSP
DIGITAL
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
Program No. 10 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing
the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).
BASIC OPERATION
56
ADVANCED FEATURES
1. CENTER SPEAKER
2. REAR SPEAKER
3. MAIN SPEAKER
4. LFE/BASS OUT
5. MAIN LEVEL
6. DOLBY DGTL SET
LFE LEVEL
7. DOLBY DGTL SET
DYNAMIC RANGE
8. DTS SET
LFE LEVEL
19. CENTER DELAY
10. PARAMETER INI
11. MEMORY GUARD
12.TV/DBS INPUT
13. DIMMER
m Changes and adjustments
The following 13 functions maximize the performance of your system and increase the enjoyment of audio listening and video watching.
“SET MENU”mode
Refer to the information in the display panel or monitor screen during operation. The monitor power must be turned on to display
information on the monitor.
When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position.
Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995
SPEAKERS
PHONES
A
ON
OFF
B
BASS TREBLE BALANCE
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LR
l6
20
28
40
60
l2
8
4
2
0
–dB
BASS
EXTENSION
TONE
BYPASS
55
4
3
2
l
0
l
2
3
4
LEVEL EFFECT
SET
MENU
PROGRAM
A
/
B
/
C
/
D
/
E
1
2345678
MEMORY EDIT
FM/AM
DOWN
TUNING
UP
INPUT MODE
TUNING
MODE
MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO
PRESET
kHz
MHz
MEMORY
AM
FM
SLEEPAUTO
TAPE 2 MONITOR
DIGITAL
STEREO
0
20
l00
ROOM 2 CONTROL
NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM
40 60
SPEAKERS
RT PS
PTY
PTY HOLD
EON
NEWS
INFO AFFAIRS SPORT
PCM AC
3
CT
DSP
PRO LOGIC
DIGITAL
AUTO TUNING
A
SPEAKERS
B
ROOM 2
70
mm
ENHANCED
dB
ms
EXT. DECODER
STANDBY/ON
CINEMA DSP
VCR 2
VIDEO AUX
REC OUT/ZONE 2
VCR 1
TV/DBS
PHONO
TUNER
CDDVD/LD
SOURCE
TAPE/MD
2
1
1 To make changes, select the applicable function by using one of the following methods.
When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller:
2 Select the desired position or edit parameter for the function by using the following keys.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change a setting or adjust for another function.
Press once or more.
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
V-AUX
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
Press once or more.
LEVEL
SET
MENU
LEVEL
SET
MENU
Set to “SET MENU”
2
1
57
English
ADVANCED FEATURES
1. CENTER SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 5. MAIN LEVEL
2. REAR SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT
(Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system)
Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change, unless your
speaker system is modified.)
m Function description
6. DOLBY DGTL SET
LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel]
Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB
Preset value: 0 dB
This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is
decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded
with Dolby Digital contain LFE signals.
Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)
channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other
channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio
of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5
for details about the LFE channel.)
Choices: MAX/STD/MIN
Preset position: MAX
This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is
decoded.
“Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level
and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie
originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide
dynamic range.
Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound track into
a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged.
Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not
always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of
your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase
the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in
a level suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts of
source sound cannot be heard well because they will be lost
among noises in your environment.
Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to reduce an
original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format
by “compressing” the data of sound.
MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital
is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide
dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds
like a movie theater.
Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can
listen to a source in a high output level in a room
specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment.
STD (Standard):
In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital
is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of
the source suitable for low level listening.
MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than
in the STD position. Selecting this position will be
effective when you must listen to a source in an
extremely low level.
* In this position, it may happen that sound is output
faintly or not output normally depending on a
source. In that case, select the MAX or STD
position.
7. DOLBY DGTL SET
DYNAMIC RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range)
58
ADVANCED FEATURES
9. CENTER DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)]
Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step)
Preset value: 0 ms
This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or
DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center
channel signals.
Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main
channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel).
The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated.
In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to
your listening position may be shorter than the distance from
the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that
case, sounds from the left main, center and right main
speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by
delaying the sound from the center speaker.
10. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program)
You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program.
Note that some DSP programs have two subprograms; all
parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this
operation.
Initializing method
Use the remote controller for the operation.
A program number whose parameters has been changed is
marked with “
*
”. Press a DSP program selector key which
corresponds to the program number whose parameters you
want to initialize. When initialized, the “
*
” mark will disappear.
8. DTS SET
LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel]
Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB
Preset value: 0 dB
This adjustment is effective only when DTS is decoded and
the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS
contain LFE signals.
Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)
channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other
channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio
of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5
for details about the LFE channel.)
59
English
12. TV/DBS INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode of the source connected to the
TV/DBS input terminals)
For the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this
unit, you can designate the input mode that is automatically
selected when the power of this unit is switched on.
AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always
selected when the power of this unit is switched on.
LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the
last time is memorized and will not be changed even if
the power of this unit is switched off.
* Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode.
13. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel)
You can adjust the brightness of the display panel in five
degree increments.
11. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments)
If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters
and other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position,
they are locked and cannot be changed. The following
functions on this unit can be locked by this operation.
DSP parameters
Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode
ON SCREEN display key
LEVEL key
TEST key
ADVANCED FEATURES
60
What is a sound field?
In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we
need to first understand what a sound field really is.
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are
the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition
to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell
where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the
room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is
highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more
absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains.
The elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two
distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the
sound field:
(1) Early Reflections.
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly
(50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting
from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a
wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown
in the diagram on page 62 for any particular environment,
and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections
actually add clarity to the direct sound.
(2) Reverberations.
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation
taken together help us to determine the subjective size and
shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would
be able to create your own listening environment. The
acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert
hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability
to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done
with the DSP.
DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine
apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to
the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are
preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create
the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to
use DSP programs without changing values of parameters,
however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound
fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust
those parameters. Even if the power cord of this unit is
disconnected from the AC outlet, your custom sound fields will
remain in the DSP’s memory for about two weeks. The
following page details how to make your own sound fields.
Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to
change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to
precisely create the effect you want. For the programs which
have subprograms, each subprogram has a set of parameters.
These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic
factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual
concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the
room, for example, affects the length of time between the
“early reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced
reflections you hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE”
parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the
timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of
the “room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the
room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant
effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for
example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out
quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to
carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow
you to control these and many other factors that contribute to
your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially
“redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create
custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your
mood and music.
Refer to “Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters” on
pages 62 to 64 for a description of what each parameter does,
how it effects the sound, and its control range.
Creating your own sound fields
ADVANCED FEATURES
61
English
m Selecting and editing program parameters
This adjustment can be made only by using the remote controller and watching the monitor screen or the display panel.
Note
Information on the monitor screen would be
easier to see than the display panel.
1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the
PARAMETER position.
Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.
2 Turn your monitor on. If the currently selected type of
display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN
display key and select the full display.
3 If no DSP program is selected, select a desired
program.
The selected program name and its parameters will be
displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped
cursor points to the first parameter or subprogram name.
4 If necessary, select the desired subprogram.
Press the button for
the currently selected
program once or more.
5 Select the parameter which you want to edit.
6 Change the value on the selected parameter to create
the effect you want.
“+” increases the value of the selected parameter, and “–”
decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both cases
you can hold the key down to quickly move to the desired
value.
The display will pause for a moment at the initial set value of
the parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen, the
*
mark at the head of the parameter name will disappear upon
reaching the initial set value of the parameter.)
Notes
For details about parameters, refer to pages 62 to 64.
Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even
if power is lost due to a power failure or the power plug is
disconnected from the AC outlet for about two weeks, after
which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or
setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values
or conditions.
PARAMETER
SET MENU
ON SCREEN
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
or
Subprogram
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
V AUX
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
ADVANCED FEATURES
4, 5, 6
1
2
3, 4
62
m Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters
Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
ROOM SIZE
How it Affects the Sound:
Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger
the value, the larger the simulated room will sound.
What it Does:
Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early
reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before
the subsequent, dense reverberation begins.
Control Range:
0.1 – 2.0
Standard setting is 1.0.
Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent
volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all
doubled).
P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size)
Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound
field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between
reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound
source.
S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size)
Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field.
The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field
becomes.
INIT. DELAY (Initial Delay)
How it Affects the Sound:
Changes the apparent distance from the source sound.
Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective
surface determines the delay between the direct sound and
the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the
sound source within the acoustic environment.
What it Does:
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first
reflection heard by the listener.
Control Range:
1 – 99 milliseconds
For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small
value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an
echo effect.
P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay)
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the
later the first reflection begins.
Control Range:
1 – 99 milliseconds
S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay)
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value,
the later the first reflection begins.
Control Range:
1 – 49 milliseconds
INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY
Level
Direct sound
Early reflections
Time
Small space
Small
Level
Direct sound
Early reflections
Time
Large
Level
Direct sound
Early reflections
Time
Large space
Level
Time
Small
Level Level
Time
Time
Large
Direct sound
Early reflections
ADVANCED FEATURES
63
English
LIVENESS
How it Affects the Sound:
This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls
in the hall.
The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity
(decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent
wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective
surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the
early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room
with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay
rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you
adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness”
of the room.
What it Does:
Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay.
Control Range:
0 – 10.
LIVENESS (Presence Liveness)
Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence
sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front
presence sound field becomes.
S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness)
Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround
sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear
surround sound field becomes.
REV.TIME (Reverberation Time)
How it Affects the Sound:
The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily
on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This
parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the
acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.
What it Does:
Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense,
subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz).
Control Range:
1.0 – 5.0 seconds.
The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be
between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2
and 3.
REV. TIME
60 dB
REV. TIME
60 dB
REV. TIME
60 dB
Level
Time
Small
Level Level
Time
Time
Large
Direct sound
Dead Live
Level
Reverberations Reverberations Reverberations
Time
Small
Level Level
Time
Time
Large
Direct sound
Early reflections
ADVANCED FEATURES
64
REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level)
This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control Range:
0 – 100%
S. DELAY (Surround Delay)
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the
later the surround sound field is generated.
Control Range:
When Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded:
15 – 30 milliseconds
When Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded:
0 – 15 milliseconds
When a program without Dolby Surround or DTS
encoded is used:
15 – 49 milliseconds
REV. LEVEL
Level
Direct sound
Time
ADVANCED FEATURES
65
English
1 Select the source using the INPUT SELECTOR and
start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the
source unit.
2 Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until the desired
SLEEP time appears on the display.
* “SLEEP time” is the time that elapses before this unit
is automatically turned into the standby mode.
Each time you press the SLEEP key, the SLEEP time
changes as follows.
After a while, the display returns to the original indication.
To cancel the SLEEP timer
Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears
on the display. (After a while, the display returns to the original
indication.)
Note
The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting this
unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on
the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote controller)
or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet.
A
B
C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
SLEEP
A
B
C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
SLEEP
Use the built-in SLEEP timer to automatically turn this unit into the standby mode after the time you set elapses. The SLEEP timer is
useful when you plan to fall asleep while this unit is playing back or recording a source. The SLEEP timer also automatically turns off
external units connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear of this unit. The SLEEP timer can only be set using the
remote controller.
To set the SLEEP time
120 90 60 30
SLEEP OFF
(The SLEEP timer is off.)
(Minutes)
Indicates the SLEEP time.
Flashes.
SPEAKERS
A
CD
TUNER
PHONO
TAPE/MD
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
V-AUX
VCR 1
VCR 2
SLEEP
Setting the SLEEP timer
ADVANCED FEATURES
66
The remote controller is designed to control the most commonly used functions. If the CD player, tape deck, LD player, etc. is a
YAMAHA component with remote control compatibility, this remote controller will also control various functions.
* For basic operations, the cover must be opened.
m Key name and function
MACROQUICK
OFFSLOW
A/B
REC/PAUSE
BA
A
B
EFFECT
ON/OFF
C
DIR
DISCSTOP
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
0
MUTE
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
V-AUX
DVD/LD
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
TV/DBS
1
3
2
4
8
7
9
A
D
I
G
G
E
F
C
B
5
J
6
H
0
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
View with the Side view
cover opened.
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Basic operation (Cover is open)
The remote controller can operate the main unit as well as other Yamaha audio and video components. The Macro feature allows
you to program a series of functions in sequence onto a single key, or you can use one of the preset macros to operate other
Yamaha components in your home theater. This remote controller also has a sophisticated Learn feature that allows it to acquire
functions from other remote controllers you use with other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped
with infrared remote control receivers. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote controllers in your
listening room.
67
English
REMOTE CONTROLLER
1 TAPE/MD keys
These keys control tape decks or MD recorders.
The A/B/C switch (
I) should be set to the “A” position to
control tape decks, and “C” position for MD recorders.
* The DIR A, B and A/B keys apply only to double cassette
tape decks.
* Pressing the DIR A key will reverse the tape direction on a
single cassette tape deck with the automatic reverse
function.
* The and keys work as follows.
For tape decks:
: Rewinds a tape.
: Advances a tape fast.
For MD recorders:
: Locates the beginning of the current or previous
track.
: Locates the beginning of the next track.
2 CD/DVD/LD player keys
These keys control compact disc players, DVD players or LD
players.
Set the A/B/C switch (
I) to the “A” position to control
compact disc players, “B” position for DVD players and “C”
position for LD players.
* The DISC key is used for disc changers only.
* The STOP key is used for DVD players and LD players only.
3 Tuner keys
Control tuners.
The A/B/C switch (
I) should be set to the “A” position.
+: Press this key to select the next preset station number.
: Press this key to select the previous preset station
number.
A/B/C/D/E: Selects the group (A – E) of preset station
numbers.
4 DSP program selector keys
Press a key to select a DSP program when the built-in digital
sound field processor is on. Includes the Dolby Pro Logic
Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder, and DTS decoder.
5 TEST key
This key is used when adjusting the speaker balance. (Refer to
pages 32 to 34.)
6 LEVEL key
This key is used to adjust the output level of the center and
rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this key (several
times) to select the speaker(s). The name will be illuminated
on the display. Then press the + or keys (
D
) to change the
output level.
7 PARAMETER/SET MENU switch
Set this switch to “PARAMETER” to edit a DSP program
parameter. Set to “SET MENU” to adjust or make changes in a
function in the SET MENU mode.
8 SLEEP timer key
Press this key to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off, and
set the SLEEP time. (Refer to page 65.)
9 ON SCREEN display key
Press this key to change the type of display on the monitor
screen. Three types of displays are available.
Each time the key is pressed, the information can be changed
to a full, simple and no display.
0 SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys
Press the SYSTEM POWER ON key to turn on the power.
Press the STANDBY key to set this unit in the standby mode.
A RESET button
This button is inside the battery compartment.
Press this button to reset the internal microcomputer for
controling remote control operations. This button is used when
the remote controller “freezes”.
* Learned functions will not be erased when this button is
pressed.
B MASTER VOLUME (up) and (down) keys
Press these keys to increase or decrease the volume.
C MUTE key
Press this key to mute the volume. The volume can be
returned to the original level by pressing any remote controller
key which controls this unit.
The indicator on the VOLUME control flashes during the mute
mode.
D / and –/+ keys
The (up) and (down) keys change the parameters or
functions according to the mode selected by the
PARAMETER/SET MENU switch. The and + keys adjust or
make changes in the parameter or function.
E EFFECT ON/OFF key
Press this key to turn on/off the digital sound field processor,
which includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby
Digital decoder and DTS decoder.
F EXT. DEC. key
Press this key to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL
DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function
takes priority over the input selector key setting. “EXT.
DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel.
The source selected with the input selector keys becomes the
current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated
on the display panel.
G Input selector keys
Press a key to select the input source.
H A/B/C indicators
One of these indicators will turn to red depending on the
position of the A/B/C switch.
I A/B/C switch
Normally this switch is set to the “A” position. Use the “B”
position to control a Yamaha DVD player with the CD/DVD/LD
player keys (
2
). Use the “C” position to control a Yamaha LD
player with the CD/DVD/LD player keys (
2
), or control a
Yamaha MD recorder with the TAPE/MD keys (
1
).
J TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator
This indicator will be illuminated when a key is pressed on the
remote controller. (Transmitting infrared signals.)
Note
The functions of the keys to control other Yamaha
components are the same as the corresponding keys on
those components. Refer to those components’ instruction
manuals for details.
RESET button
68
REMOTE CONTROLLER
This is a learning remote controller. The shaded keys in the illustration shown below can be programmed to “learn” control
functions from other remote controllers. This unit can be used in place of other remote controllers by learning their functions. It will
be much convenient for you to operate various audio and video components.
Some of the “learning-capable” keys are originally empty and others have already been preset with functions to control this unit and
other Yamaha components. You can store new functions to them (in place of preset functions) as desired.
* See page 74 for the learning method.
* See page 76 for clearing a learned function (or all learned functions).
Note
If the memory capacity of the remote controller becomes full, no further learning is possible even if some learning-capable keys are
not occupied with new functions. If, for example, you store Yamaha codes only into this remote controller, up to about 20 functions
can be stored. Therefore, we recommend that only required functions be stored.
Keys which can have three functions (1, 2, 3, 4)
In the “Learning-capable” keys, the keys numbered 14 in the
illustration on the left can have three functions. This is because they
have three memory areas (A, B and C). (One function per area.)
You can store new functions into the area B and C, and use three
functions on a key by switching the memory areas with the A/B/C
switch. (Area A cannot learn a new function.)
To use these keys:
1. Before using a key, select area A, B or C of the key on which the
function you want to use is stored by using the A/B/C switch.
2. Press the key.
The default settings of these keys are as follows.
Preset with
functions for
controlling a
Yamaha tape
deck.
Preset with
functions for
controlling a
Yamaha CD
player.
(STOP is empty.)
Preset with
functions for
controlling the
built-in tuner.
Preset as the DSP
program selector
keys (1–9, 0) and
the TEST key.
(+10 is empty.)
Empty
Preset with functions
for controlling a
Yamaha DVD player
(except the models
DVD-1000 and
DVD-S700).
Empty
Preset as the DSP
program selector
keys (1–9, 0) and
the TEST key.
(+10 is empty.)
Preset with functions
for controlling a
Yamaha MD
recorder.
(A/B, DIR A and B
are empty.)
Preset with
functions for
controlling a
Yamaha LD player.
(DISC is empty.)
Empty
Preset as the DSP
program selector
keys (1–9, 0) and
the TEST key.
(+10 is empty.)
4
1
2
3
The position of A/B/C switch
A
B
EFFECT
ON/OFF
C
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
456
78
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
V-AUX
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
TV/DBS
DIR
STOP DISC
REC/PAUSE
A/B
BA
0
1
3
2
4
1
2
JAZZ CLUB
123
TV
SPORTS
THEATER 1
MOVIE
MOVIE
MONO
THEATER 2
MOVIE
CONCERT DISCO
ROCK
456
HALL CHURCH
789
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
A/B/C switch
Cover is open.
(
*
1): These buttons are used for learning a new function
or clearing a learned function (or all learned
functions). For details, refer to pages 74 to 76 .
(
*
1)
Using the “learning-capable” keys (Cover is open)
A
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
B
VCR 1
DVD/LD
TV/DBS
C
VCR 2
V-AUX
69
English
Notes
Area A cannot learn a new function. To store a new function,
store it onto area B or C.
If a key which has a preset function learns a new function,
the preset function will not work but is not deleted. When the
learned function is cleared, the preset function is restored.
(For information on clearing a learned function, refer to page
76.)
Empty keys (1, 2)
These are empty keys. Each key can learn a function from
another remote controller.
For example, the TV key is useful for storing the function of
your TV’s power switch, and the VCR key can be used for your
VCR’s power switch.
About the marks on the remote controller
An input selector key and other control keys which have the
same mark will work for the same input source.
These marks are also helpful for storing new functions.
Examples)
Area B of keys 1 is suitable for storing functions to control
your VCR.
Area B of keys 3 is suitable for storing functions to control
your TV/BS tuner.
Mark Meaning
Tape (Tape deck, VCR, etc.)
Disc (CD player, LD player, etc.)
Radio wave (Tuner, TV/BS tuner, etc.)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
To record new functions
It is recommended that you write down stored key functions
on the provided user function stickers and paste them on the
reverse side of the remote controller or the reverse side of
the remote controller’s cover.
Memory back-up
All of the learned functions will be retained while you
replace the batteries. However, if no batteries are
installed for a few hours, the learned functions will be
erased and will have to be learned again.
A
B
C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
70
REMOTE CONTROLLER
When the cover of the remote controller is closed, you can easily operate Yamaha components including learned functions by using
the OPERATION CONTROL keys.
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
V-AUX
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
TV/DBS
TV
VCR
MUTE
MASTER
VOLUME
OPERATION
CONTROL
EFFECT
TRANSMIT
A/B
REC/PAUSE
BA
A
B
EFFECT
ON/OFF
C
DIR
DISCSTOP
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
LEARNCLEAR MACROMACRO
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
JAZZ CLUB
123
MOVIE THEATER 1
MONO
THEATER
TV
CONCERT
ROCK
THEATER 2
MOVIE
456
HALL CHURCH
789
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
V-AUX
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
TV/DBS
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
( )
MOVIE
DISCO
+10
1
2
3
Input selector keys
OPERATION CONTROL keys
Cover is closed.
When the cover is closed, the OPERATION CONTROL keys
substitute for the keys numbered 1, 2 or 3 and the
(+10) keys on the above illustration. To use these keys, you do
not have to switch the A/B/C switch. The functions of the
OPERATION CONTROL keys are determined by the input
selector key pressed before using the OPERATION
CONTROL keys.
Note
Whether the cover is opened or closed, the EFFECT,
MASTER VOLUME, MUTE, TV and VCR keys will not change
their functions.
* If the MACRO switch on the side of the remote controller is
set to “OFF”, the SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY
keys will not also change their functions whether the cover
is opened or closed.
(
*
1): This key is originally empty. If this key has a learned
function, pressing this key executes the learned function.
Using OPERATION CONTROL keys (Cover is closed)
(
*
1)
71
English
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Notes
If an OPERATION CONTROL key is substituted for a key which has no function (empty), then a command will not be carried out.
Depending on your plan, store functions from other remote controllers into an empty area of those keys. (Refer to page 74 for the
learning method.)
While playing an audio/video unit, if you want to operate another unit by using the remote controller (for example, if you want to
rewind a videotape while listening to a CD), you should open the cover of the remote controller and use the A/B/C switch and the
corresponding keys.
(If you press an input selector key with the cover closed to change the functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys to the
functions for controlling a VCR, the input of currently playing CD source is canceled.)
Examples of operations controlled by using the
OPERATION CONTROL keys
To operate a Yamaha CD player
1. Press the “CD” input selector key.
2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the
functions in area A of keys
2.)
To operate your VCR
1. Press the “VCR” input selector key.
2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the
functions in area B of keys
1. This area is originally preset
with no function. You must store the functions related to
controlling the VCR in area B of keys
1 beforehand.)
Selected input selector key
Key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out
Functions in area A of keys
1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)
Functions in area A of keys
2 (except STOP, DISC, and )
Functions in area A of keys
3 and (+10)
Functions in area B of keys
1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)
Functions in area B of keys
2 (except STOP, DISC, and )
Functions in area B of keys
3 and (+10)
Functions in area C of keys
1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)
Functions in area C of keys
2 (except STOP, DISC, and )
Functions in area C of keys
3 and (+10)
See the table below for a combination of an input selector key and key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out.
(Also, refer to the table on page 68.)
Pressing the “PHONO” or “EXT. DEC.” input selector key has no effect on the OPERATION CONTROL keys.
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
V-AUX
TV/DBS
OPERATION
CONTROL
Play
Skip to
previous track
Skip to next
track
Pause or Stop
OPERATION
CONTROL
Play
Rewind Fast forward
Pause or Stop
72
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Macro operations (Cover is closed)
The Macro feature makes it possible to operate a series of
functions by pressing just one key. For example, when you want
to play a CD, normally you would turn on the equipment, select
the CD input, and press the play key to start playback. Using the
Macro feature you can operate all those functions by simply
pressing the CD macro key. The preset macro keys (the input
selector keys and SYSTEM POWER ON/STANDBY keys with an
orange mark next to them) are preset with macro programs.
If you prefer, however, you can change the contents of a
macro key by storing a desired series of functions on it. You
can store up to seven functions onto a macro key. (Refer to
page 75 for making a new macro.)
Macros can be used only when the cover is closed and the
MACRO switch is set to “SLOW” or “QUICK”. (If “OFF” is
selected, no macro will function even if the cover is closed.)
Setting the MACRO switch
OFF: In this position, no macro will function even if the
cover of the remote controller is closed.
QUICK: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each
command is transmitted at 0.5 second intervals.
SLOW: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each
command is transmitted at 3 second intervals.
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
PHONO
V-AUX
EXT. DEC.
TV/DBS
TV
VCR
MUTE
MASTER
VOLUME
OPERATION
CONTROL
EFFECT
TRANSMIT
MACROQUICK
OFFSLOW
A/B
REC/PAUSE
BA
A
B
EFFECT
ON/OFF
C
DIR
DISCSTOP
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
PARAMETER
SET MENU
SLEEP
ON SCREEN
LEVEL
MASTER VOLUME
TV
VCR
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
MUTE
REMOTE CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
V-AUX
EXT. DEC.
PHONO
TV/DBS
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
1
2
0
JAZZ CLUB
123
MOVIE THEATER 1
MONO
THEATER
TV
CONCERT
ROCK
THEATER 2
MOVIE
456
HALL CHURCH
789
+10
0
/
DTS
SURROUND
TEST
MOVIE
DISCO
Cover is closed.
(Set the MACRO switch to
“QUICK” or “SLOW”.)
Preset macro keys
MACRO switch
73
English
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Macro key
1st
(Turns on this unit.)
2nd
(Selects an input source.)
3rd
(Starts playback of a source.)
“”on area A of keys
1
“”on area A of keys 2
“”on area B of keys
1
“”on area B of keys 2
“”on area C of keys
1
“”on area C of keys 2
Function of the key (and area) carried out when a macro key is pressed
Macro key
1st
Turns on this unit.
Sets this unit to the standby
mode.
2nd
Carries out the function of the
TV key.
3rd
Carries out the function of the
VCR key.
Function of the key carried out when a macro key is pressed
The Macro feature allows you to operate several remote control functions in a programmed order by pressing one macro key.
(Also, refer to the table on page 68.)
Notes
A key in which no function is stored will carry out no
command.
If it occurs that this unit will not receive the second command
because the internal operation of the first command takes a
long time, set the MACRO switch to the “SLOW” position.
Once you press a macro key, this unit will not receive the
command of another key (even if it is pressed) until this unit
finishes carrying out all commands of the macro key. Take
notice of this especially when the MACRO switch is in the
“SLOW” position.
Once you press a macro key, you must keep the remote
controller directed at the main unit’s remote control sensor
until the remote controller finishes transmitting all command
signals of the macro key.
You can also use the OPERATION CONTROL keys while
using the macro functions.
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
V-AUX
PHONO
EXT. DEC.
TV/DBS
TAPE/MD
CD
TUNER
VCR 1
VCR 2
DVD/LD
V-AUX
PHONO
EXT. DEC.
TV/DBS
SYSTEM
POWER ON
SYSTEM
POWER ON
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER ON
STANDBY
TV
VCR
74
REMOTE CONTROLLER
m Learning a new function
1 Place this remote controller and the other remote
controller so that they face each other.
2
* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the
LEARN button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator
flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat
this step.
3 If necessary, select the memory area by using the A/B/C
switch on the side panel of the remote controller.
4 Press the key on this remote controller in which you will
store a new function.
* If a key which cannot learn another function is pressed, the
TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current
mode is canceled. Repeat this step.
* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after a key is
pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly
and the mode before you began learning operations is
restored. Restart from step 2.
5 Press and hold the key (on the other remote controller)
which has the function you want to store.
When learning is finished, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator
stops lighting. You can release the key. Then the indicator
begins flashing slowly.
* If a signal is not successfully received, the
TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode
prior to step 4 is restored. Restart from step 4.
* If memory capacity is full, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator
flashes rapidly to show you that learning is impossible, and
then the mode before you began learning operations is
restored.
6 Repeat steps 3–5 to store more functions.
7 When you finish the learning operation, press the
LEARN button.
Notes
Newly learned functions will replace previously learned
functions.
If there is no more room in the memory area for a function to
be learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator will flash
rapidly. In this case, even if some keys are not occupied
with functions from other remote controllers, no further
learning is possible.
If you close the cover while learning, and then about 5
seconds pass, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes
rapidly and the mode before beginning learning operations
is restored. Restart from step 2. However, if you open the
cover within 5 seconds, the mode before closing the cover is
restored.
There may occasionally be instances in which, due to the
signal-coding and modulation employed by the other remote
controller, this remote controller will not be able to “learn” its
signals.
When you press the LEARN, MACRO or CLEAR button, or
the RESET button inside of the battery compartment by
using a sharp-pointed thing, be careful not to damage the
button. If you will use a mechanical pencil, make sure that
the lead is retracted.
V-AUX
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
123
SPORTS
STADIUM
DISCO
TV
456
ROCK
JAZZ CLUB
CHURCH
789
TEST
E
+10
Lights up.
V-AUX
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
123
ORTS
STADIUM
DISCO
TV
56
CLUB
CHURCH
9
EST
This remote
controller
Other remote
controller
About 5–10 cm
(2–4 in.)
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
Flashes slowly.
(Press by using a ball-point
pen or similar object.)
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
V-AUX
PHONO
EFFECT
ON/OFF
123
SPORTS
STADIUM
DISCO
TV
456
OCK
JAZZ CLUB
CHURCH
89
TEST
10
Methods of learning and clearing functions
75
English
m Making a new macro
A new macro can be programmed onto any preset macro key in place of the factory preset functions. (See page 72 to know what
keys are preset macro keys.) You can make as many as 13 new macro keys. A macro key can learn as many as seven functions of
other keys.
Note
If you store a continuous function such as lowering the volume level, it may not work well when carried out as a part of macro.
REMOTE CONTROLLER
1
* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the
MACRO button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN
indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you pressed
the MACRO button is restored. Press the MACRO button
again.
2 Press a preset macro key on which you want to make a
new macro.
* If a key other than a preset macro key is pressed, the
TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the
current mode is canceled. Repeat this step.
3 Press a key whose function you want to store as the first
function of the new macro.
* If a key whose function cannot be stored as a command of
macro is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes
rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step.
* If about 30 seconds pass before a key is pressed, the
TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode
before you began learning operations is restored. Restart
from step 1.
4 Repeat step 3 to store the second, the third and more
functions. You can store up to seven key functions in
series as a macro.
* If the seventh key function has been learned, the
TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode
before you began learning operations is restored. (This
shows that the key has completed learning a series of
functions as a macro.) You do not have to follow the next
step.
5 When you finish learning, press the MACRO button.
Notes
If, for example, you store a function whose operation takes a
long time as the first command, add a command which has
no function between the first command and the second
command, or repeat the second command again.
If you program the power on/off switching function of TV,
VCR, etc. as a part of a macro sequence, note that it
switches the current mode to the other (“on” to “off”, or “off”
to “on”).
For example, when you press the macro key, if the power of
TV, VCR, etc. is already on, the power will be turned off even
though you may not want it to do so.
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
Goes off.
(When learning is finished,
this indicator lights up again.)
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
Flashes slowly.
CD
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
Lights up.
SYSTEM
POWER ON
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
76
REMOTE CONTROLLER
1 To clear a learned key function, press the LEARN button
using a ball-point pen or similar object.
To clear a macro you made, press the MACRO button.
2 Press and hold the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen
or similar object.
3 Holding the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the
key whose function you want to clear until the indicator
flashes 3 times.
To clear two or more functions sequentially, do not
release the CLEAR button, and repeat this step.
Note
If you clear a learned function of a key, the key is restored by
the originally preset function. (except the keys which are
originally preset with no function.)
To Clear a Learned Function To Clear All Learned Functions
1 Select the kind of key functions all of which you want to
clear by using the MACRO switch on the side panel of
the remote controller.
OFF: Select this position if you want to clear all of the
learned functions except macros.
QUICK: Select this position if you want to clear all of the
macros you made.
SLOW: Select this position if you want to clear all of the
learned functions including macros.
2 Press the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen or
similar object.
* If one of the following is made after you press the CLEAR
button, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly
and the current mode is canceled. Press the CLEAR
button again.
MACRO switch is switched to another position.
Another key is pressed.
There is no operation for about 30 seconds.
3 Press and hold the CLEAR button again. While holding
down the CLEAR button, press and hold the MASTER
VOLUME and keys simultaneously until the
indicator flashes 7 times.
MACROQUICK
OFFSLOW
m Clearing learned functions
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
Flashes slowly.
or
CD
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
Flashes.
LEARNCLEAR MACRO
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
Flashes slowly.
MUTE
TRANSMIT
/LEARN
Flashes.
77
English
REMOTE CONTROL OUT
AUDIO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT
REMOTE CONTROL IN
CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE
You can make up a dual-room audio/video system with this unit. In this system, you can make this unit send audio and video
signals to the main room’s equipment (speakers and TV monitor) and the second room’s equipment (amplifier and TV monitor)
respectively. For example, you can enjoy listening to a CD source in the main room while another person is enjoying watching an
LD source in the second room.
m Connections
The following optional products are required to use the dual-
room function.
1 An infrared emitter in the main room
This emitter emits the infrared signals transmitted by the
remote controller in the second room to the other
components in the main room (for example, CD player or
LD player).
2 An amplifier, TV monitor and speakers for the second room
3 A remote controller used in the second room
4 An infrared signal receiver for the second room
Connect the ZONE 2 OUT audio output terminals of this unit to
the MAIN IN terminals (or equivalents) of the amplifier in the
second room, and connect the ZONE 2 OUT video output
terminal of this unit to the video signal input terminal of the TV
monitor in the second room.
Up to 6 units can be connected in this
connecting way.
This unit
3 Remote controller
LD player etc.
This unit
Main Room
Amplifier
TV monitor
4 Infrared signal receiver
Second Room
1 Infrared emitter
2
OUTINOUTOUT IN
Example of system configuration and connections
(
*
1)
(*1): Some Yamaha models can be connected to this unit’s
REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminals. If you connect these
units in series, the use of an infrared emitter may not be
necessary.
Note
Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a
dual-room system, we recommend that you consult with a
custom installation specialist for connections which will best
meet your requirements.
78
CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE
m Listening to (and watch) a source in the second room
1 Set the VOLUME control of the amplifier in the second
room to “minimum”.
2 Select the source you will listen to and/or watch in the
second room with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector on the
front panel of this unit in the main room.
3 Play back the source.
4 Increase the volume on the amplifier in the second room.
Notes
If you want to listen to (and watch) the same source as that
selected for the main room, set the REC OUT/ZONE 2
selector to the “SOURCE” position.
Signals of the source selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2
selector are also sent to the tape deck, VCR, etc. connected
to this unit as signals to be recorded.
79
English
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the
instruction below does not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
Problem
The unit fails to turn on when the
STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns
into the standby mode suddenly soon after
the power is turned on.
This unit does not work normally.
No sound or no picture.
No picture
The sound suddenly goes off.
Only one side speaker outputs the sound.
No sound from the effect speakers.
No sound from the center speaker.
Poor bass reproduction.
Sound “hums”.
The volume level is low while playing a
record.
The volume level cannot be increased, or
sound is distorted.
Cause
Power cord is not plugged in or is not
completely inserted.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the
rear panel is not set to either end.
There is an influence of strong external
noise (lightning, excessive static electricity,
etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while
using this unit.
Incorrect output cord connections.
Appropriate input source is not selected.
Speaker connections are not secure.
Digital signals other than PCM audio and
Dolby Digital (or DTS) encoded signals
which this unit cannot reproduce are input to
this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc.
There is no S video terminal connection
between this unit and the TV, though S
video signals are input to this unit.
The protection circuit has been activated
because of short circuit etc.
The SLEEP timer came on.
Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control.
Incorrect cord connections.
The EFFECT button is set off.
A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding
program is being used with material not
encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS).
The function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the
SET MENU mode is set to the “NONE”
position.
One of the DSP programs No. 1 to No. 5 is
selected when the input signal of source is
2-channel stereo (analog/PCM).
The input signals of source encoded with
Dolby Digital or DTS do not have center
channel signals.
The function “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET
MENU mode is set in the SW or BOTH
position, though your system does not
include a subwoofer.
Output mode selection for each channel
(MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper.
Incorrect cord connections.
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The component connected to the TAPE/MD
OUT terminals of this unit is turned off.
What to Do
Firmly plug in the power cord.
Set the switch to either end when this unit is
in the standby mode.
Turn this unit into the standby mode and
disconnect the AC power cord from the AC
outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed,
connect the power and operate this unit
again.
Connect the cords properly. If the problem
persists, the cords may be defective.
Select the appropriate input source with the
INPUT SELECTOR or the EXT. DECODER
button.
Secure the connections.
Play a source whose signals this unit can
reproduce.
Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT
terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal.
Turn this unit into the standby mode, and
then turn on to reset the protection circuit.
Cancel the SLEEP timer function.
Adjust it to the appropriate position.
Connect the cords properly. If the problem
persists, the cords may be defective.
Press the EFFECT button to turn it on.
Use a different sound field program.
Select the appropriate position.
Select another program.
Refer to the instructions for the source
currently played.
Select the MAIN position.
Make output mode selections suitable for
your speaker system.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the
problem persists, the cords may be defective.
Make the GND connection between the
turntable and this unit.
The player should be connected to the unit
through the MC head amplifier.
Turn on the power to the component.
General
TROUBLESHOOTING
80
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The remote controller does not work.
The remote controller does not function
properly.
Learning cannot be made successfully.
(The TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator does not
light up or flash.)
Continuous functions such as volume are
learned, but operate only for a moment
before stopping.
Cause
The batteries of this remote controller are
weak.
The internal microcomputer “freezes”.
Wrong distance or angle.
Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type
of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote
control sensor of the main unit.
The internal microcomputer “freezes”.
The batteries of this remote controller and/or
the other remote controller are weak.
The distance between the two remote
controllers is too far or short.
The signal coding or modulation of the other
remote controller is not compatible with this
remote controller.
Memory capacity is full.
The internal microcomputer “freezes”.
Learning process incomplete.
What to Do
Replace the batteries with new ones and
press the RESET button on the remote
controller.
Press the RESET button on the remote
controller.
The remote controller will function from a
maximum range of 6 meters, no more than 30
degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Change position of the main unit.
Press the RESET button on the remote
controller.
Replace the batteries (and press the RESET
button for this remote controller).
Place the remote controllers at the proper
distance.
Learning is not possible.
Further learning is not possible without
deleting unnecessary commands.
Press the RESET button on the remote
controller.
Be sure to press and hold the function key on
the other remote controller until the
TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator begins flashing
slowly.
Remote controller
Problem
DSP parameters and some other settings
on this unit cannot be changed.
“INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display
and no sound is heard.
The sound field cannot be recorded.
This unit does not operate properly.
A source cannot be recorded by a tape
deck or VCR connected to this unit.
Noise from nearby TV or tuner.
The sound is degraded when listening with
the headphones connected to the compact
disc player or tape deck that is connected
with this unit.
Cause
The function “11. MEMORY GUARD” in the
SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position.
A nonstandardized source is played back, or
the unit playing back a source is
misoperating.
It is not possible to record the sound field on
a tape deck connected to this unit’s
TAPE/MD OUT terminals.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen
by an external electric shock (lightning,
excessive static electricity, etc.) or power
supply with low voltage.
The source unit is connected to this unit
between digital terminals only.
This unit is too close to the affected
equipment.
This unit is in the standby mode.
What to Do
Set to the “OFF” position.
Check the source, or turn off the unit playing
back the source and then turn on again.
Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC
outlet, and then plug in again after about one
minute.
Make additional connection between analog
terminals.
Move the unit further away from the affected
equipment.
Turn the power to this unit on.
81
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
A loud hissing noise is heard when you
play back a source encoded with DTS.
A percussive noise is heard when you
begin playing back a source encoded with
DTS.
No sound is heard when you play back a
source encoded with DTS, even though the
“AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is selected
on this unit.
No sound is heard when you play back an
MD onto which you have recorded a
source encoded with DTS.
No sound is heard when you play back a
DAT onto which you have recorded a
source encoded with DTS.
No sound is heard when you play back a
source (CD etc.) even though the currently
selected input mode is “AUTO”.
Problem
FM stereo reception is noisy.
There is distortion and clear reception
cannot be obtained even with a good
FM antenna.
A desired station cannot be tuned in
with the automatic tuning method.
Previously preset stations can no
longer be tuned in.
A desired station cannot be tuned in
with the automatic tuning method.
There are continuous crackling and
hissing noises.
There are buzzing and whining noises
(especially in the evening).
Cause
The player which plays back the source is
not connected to a digital audio signal input
terminal of this unit.
The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on
this unit.
If the “AUTO” input mode is selected,
depending on some sources, there may be a
case that a noise is heard while this unit is
identifying the format of input signal.
The DTS decoder built into this unit does not
function because the player has a digital
volume control and it is set at a position
other than “maximum”, “neutral” or
“ineffective”.
A source encoded with DTS cannot be
recorded onto an MD.
Depending on a DAT deck, a source
encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto
a DAT.
In the “AUTO” mode, DTS-decoding mode
cannot be changed to the normal (PCM)
digital signal input mode automatically.
Cause
Because of the characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts, this is limited to cases where
the transmitter is too far away or the
antenna input is poor.
There is multipath interference.
The station is too weak.
This unit has been unplugged for a long
period.
Weak signal or loose antenna connections.
Noises result from lightning, fluorescent
lamps, motors, thermostats and other
electrical equipment.
A television set is being used nearby.
What to Do
The player must be connected to a digital
audio signal input terminal of this unit besides
analog audio signal terminal connections.
Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn
on the DTS decoder built into this unit.
Set the input mode of the currently selected
input source to “DTS”.
Set the player’s digital volume control at the
maximum, neutral or ineffective position.
Press the INPUT MODE button on the front
panel or the input selector button (for the
currently selected source) on the remote
controller so that “PCM” appears on the
display.
What to Do
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high quality directional FM
antenna.
Set the TUNING MODE button to the manual
tuning mode.
Adjust antenna placement to eliminate
multipath interference.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use a high quality directional FM antenna.
Repeat the presetting procedure.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and rotate it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat but it is difficult to
eliminate all the noises.
Relocate this unit away from the TV.
When playing back a source encoded with DTS:
Tuner
Notes
It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back a source must be
connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a
D-to-A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard.
If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the
display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode
to prevent a noise from being output.
A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a
source encoded with DTS cannot be played back.
The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback).
FMAM
Although you make the operation for
recalling a preset station, the station
cannot be tuned in, or a station other than
the preset one is tuned in.
Some memory of the preset stations was
modified because the setting of the
FREQUENCY STEP switch was changed
after storing stations.
Repeat storing stations by following the
preset tuning procedure.
<For China and General models only>
82
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel
(When both channels are driven)
MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04%
THD, 8 ohms) ....................... 100W+100W
CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07%
THD, 8 ohms) ................................... 100W
REAR L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07%
THD, 8 ohms) .........................100W+100W
Maximum Power [China and General
models only]
1 kHz, 10% THD
, 8 ohms
(When both channels are driven)
MAIN L/R................................135W+135W
CENTER.............................................135W
REAR L/R...............................135W+135W
Dynamic Power Per Channel
(by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models
only]
MAIN L/R (8 ohms/6 ohms/4 ohms/2 ohms)
(When both channels are driven)
...............................130W/160W/200W/240W
Dynamic Headroom
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models
only]
MAIN L/R (8 ohms) .......................... 1.13 dB
DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel
[Singapore model only]
MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms)
(When both channels are driven) ..... 150W
IEC Power [Singapore model only]
MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8 ohms)
(When both channels are driven)........ 105W
Power Band Width (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
8 ohms, 50W, 0.08% THD
(When both channels are driven)
...........................................10 Hz to 50 kHz
Damping Factor
MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms)
.............................................. More than 160
Input Sensitivity/Impedance (100W/8 ohms)
CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1
/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX........ 150 mV/47 k-ohms
PHONO MM......................2.5 mV/47 k-ohms
Maximum Input Signal (1 kHz, 0.05% THD)
CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1
/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON)
................................................. 2.3V or more
PHONO MM ....................... 110 mV or more
Output Level/Impedance
REC OUT....................... 150 mV/1.0 k-ohms
PRE OUT
MAIN, CENTER, REAR
.......................................... 2.6V/1.1 k-ohms
SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL)
(EFFECT OFF) ................ 4.0V/1.5 k-ohms
ZONE 2 OUT ...................... 1.0V/1.5 k-ohms
Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
Output Level
CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1
/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input: 1 kHz,
150 mV, RL=8 ohms ........................... 0.5V
Impedance .................................... 440 ohms
Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1
/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT
....................................................... 0±0.5 dB
RIAA Equalization Deviation
(20 Hz to 20 kHz)
PHONO MM..................................0±0.5 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1
/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to SP
OUT (MAIN L/R), 50W/8 ohms
......................................... Less than 0.025%
PHONO MM to REC OUT, 3V
........................................... Less than 0.01%
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1
/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (Input Shorted)
(EFFECT OFF) .................. More than 96 dB
PHONO MM (Input Shorted 5 mV)
(EFFECT OFF)....................More than 86 dB
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
MAIN L/R SP OUT............ Less than 170 µV
Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB)
CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1
/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input 5.1 k-ohms
Shorted (EFFECT OFF)
1 kHz/10 kHz ........ More than 60 dB/45 dB
PHONO MM Input Shorted (EFFECT OFF)
1 kHz/10 kHz ..........More than 60 dB/55 dB
Tone Control Characteristics
Bass
Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB (50 Hz)
Turnover frequency ........................ 350 Hz
Treble
Boost/Cut ......................... ±10 dB (20 kHz)
Turnover frequency ....................... 3.5 kHz
Bass Extension (MAIN L/R)
....................................................+6 dB (50 Hz)
Filter Characteristics
MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R
(MAIN, CENTER, REAR SP: SMALL)
(H.P.F.) .......................fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct.
SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.)
.................................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct.
Gain Tracking Error (0 to –60 dB)
MAIN L/R ....................................3 dB or less
Audio Muting ............................................ –
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type
[U.S.A. and Canada models]................NTSC
[Australia and Singapore models] .......... PAL
[China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL
Video Signal Level ................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
S-Video Signal Level
Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms
Maximum Input Level ....... More than 1.5 Vp-p
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ........... More than 50 dB
Monitor Out Frequency Response
..................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
..........................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Australia, China, Singapore and General
models].............................87.5 to 108.0 MHz
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms,
100% mod., 1 kHz)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General
models only]
Mono.................................1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)
Stereo................................23 µV (38.5 dBf)
Usable Sensitivity (75 ohms)
[Australia and Singapore models only]
DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) .....................0.9 µV
DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB).....................28 µV
Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General
models only]..........................................75 dB
Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300
kHz)
[Australia and Singapore models only]
..............................................................55 dB
SPECIFICATIONS
83
English
SPECIFICATIONS
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
(IHF) Mono/Stereo
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General
models] ....................................81 dB/75 dB
(DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo
[Australia and Singapore models]
.................................................75 dB/69 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]
Mono/Stereo..................................0.1/0.2%
[Australia and Singapore models]
Mono/Stereo (40 kHz Dev.)...........0.1/0.2%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]
..............................................................48 dB
[Australia and Singapore models
(40 kHz Dev.)].......................................48 dB
Frequency Response
20 Hz to 15 kHz..................................0±1 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]
........................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz
[Australia and Singapore models]
............................................531 to 1,611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity..............................300 µV/m
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ..............................52 dB
AUDIO SECTION
Output Level/Impedance
FM (100% mod., 1 kHz)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General
models] ........................550 mV/1.0 k-ohms
[Australia and Singapore models
(40 kHz Dev.)] ..............550 mV/1.0 k-ohms
AM (30% mod., 1 kHz)....150 mV/1.0 k-ohms
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
............................................. AC 120V/60 Hz
[Australia model] .................. AC 240V/50 Hz
[Singapore model]................ AC 230V/50 Hz
[China and General models]
.................. AC 110/120/220/240V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A., Australia, China, Singapore and
General models] ................................. 400W
[Canada model]........................400W/540 VA
Maximum Power Consumption
[General model only] ...........................750W
AC Outlets
2 SWITCHED OUTLETS
[U.S.A., China, Singapore and General
models] ............................ 100W max. total
[Canada model] ........100W/1.0A max. total
1 SWITCHED OUTLET
[Australia model] ...................... 100W max.
Dimensions (W x H x D)
........................................ 435 x 171 x 391 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15-3/8”)
Weight ................................ 14.1 kg (31.1 lbs.)
Accessories..........................Remote controller
Batteries
User function stickers
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
Antenna adapter
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
* Specifications are subject to change without
notice.
V303930
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia

Documenttranscriptie

UCA RX-V995 AV RECEIVER AMPLI-TUNER AUDIO-VIDEO OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI • Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of your unit in the space below. Model: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 6 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. English 19 For US customers only: EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a Yamaha Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP) System—an extremely sophisticated audio component. The DSP system takes full advantage of Yamaha’s undisputed leadership in the field of digital audio processing to bring you a whole new world of listening experiences. Follow the instructions in this manual carefully when setting up your system, and the DSP system will sonically transform your room into a wide range of listening environments—anything from a famous concert hall to a cozy jazz club. In addition, you get incredible realism from most of surround-sound encoded video sources available in the market using the builtin Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder, Dolby Digital Decoder and DTS Decoder. Five built-in channels of amplification on this model mean that no additional amplifiers are required to enjoy advanced digital sound field processing. Rather than tell you about the wonders of digital sound field processing, however, let’s get right down to the business of setting up the system and trying out its many capabilities. Please read this operation manual carefully and store it in a safe place for later reference. English CONTENTS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........................................... Inside of the Front Cover BASIC OPERATION ............................................... 35 Playing a source .................................................... 35 CAUTION .................................................................. 2 Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD)......................... 40 Sound control......................................................... 42 INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 3 Tuning ..................................................................... 43 Features .................................................................... 3 Basic operation ................................................... 43 What’s DSP?............................................................. 4 Preset tuning ........................................................ 44 Using digital sound field processor (DSP) ......... 47 GETTING STARTED ................................................ 7 Getting started.......................................................... 7 Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP) ................................ 47 Unpacking .............................................................. 7 Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and subwoofer......................... 50 Installing batteries in the remote controller ........... 8 Brief overview of digital sound field programs...... 52 Notes about the remote controller.......................... 8 Controls and their functions ................................... 9 ADVANCED FEATURES ....................................... 56 Front panel ............................................................. 9 Display panel........................................................ 11 “SET MENU” mode ............................................... 56 Creating your own sound fields .......................... 60 PREPARATION ...................................................... 12 Speaker setup......................................................... 12 Setting the SLEEP timer ....................................... 65 REMOTE CONTROLLER ....................................... 66 Connections ........................................................... 14 Audio/video source equipment ............................ 14 Speakers ............................................................. 22 Antennas ............................................................. 25 Basic operation (Cover is open) .......................... 66 Using the “learning-capable” keys (Cover is open) ....................................................... 68 Plugging in this unit ............................................. 27 Using OPERATION CONTROL keys (Cover is closed) ................................................... 70 On screen display .................................................. 28 Macro operations (Cover is closed) .................... 72 Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU” mode) ............................................. 29 Methods of learning and clearing functions ....... 74 Speaker balance adjustment ................................ 32 CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE ......................... 77 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 79 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 82 1 CAUTION : Read this before operating your unit. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 3. Never remove the unit cover. Contact your dealer if an object falls inside the unit. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull on the wires themselves. 5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage. <Singapore model> Be sure to allow a space of at least 10 cm behind, 20 cm on the both sides and 35 cm above the top panel of the unit to prevent fire and damage. 6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is observed. 8. Always set the VOLUME control to “– ∞” before starting the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after playback has been started. 9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this mode, this unit is designed to consume a small amount of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. For Canadian Customers To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003. WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED: The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (U.S.A. model) 10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. SPEAKERS CENTER REAR IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON ( SURROUND ) 11. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time, CENTER : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER 12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not defeated. 14. Do not connect an audio unit to the AC outlet on the rear panel if the equipment requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. 15. Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 2 AC OUTLETS SWITCHED I20V 60Hz I00W MAX.TOTAL A B Features 5 Channel Power Amplification Main: Center: Rear: 100W + 100W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz 100W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz 100W + 100W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ● Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP) ● Dolby Digital Decoder ● Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder ● DTS Decoder ● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound Experience by the Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ● Automatic Input Balance Control for Dolby Pro Logic Surround ● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ● Speaker Output Mode Selection Capability for the Most Suitable Use of Your Speaker System English INTRODUCTION Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner ● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ● Automatic Preset Tuning ● Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) ● IF Count Direct PLL Synthesizer Tuning System Others ● “SET MENU” Mode which Provides You with 13 Titles of Setting Changes and Adjustments for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ● BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ● On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ● REC OUT Selector which is Independent of Input Source Selection ● SLEEP Timer ● OPTICAL and COAXIAL Digital Audio Signal Terminals ● 6 Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ● Video Signal Input/Output Capability (Including S Video Connections) ● Multi-Functional remote controller with “Learning” Capability ● Dual-Room Audio/Video System Setup Capability (Custom Installation) 3 INTRODUCTION What’s DSP? Introduction Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment. This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV receiver available. Some of the more advanced features may not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater Systems (DTS) may be new to your home, but you have probably experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature films in theaters around the world. To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this unit includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take some time now to read more about these features and enjoy the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater. Digital Sound Field Processing Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30 years have enhanced the listening experience with improved clarity, precision and power. However, something has still been missing: The atmosphere and acoustic ambiance of the public venue. Our Yamaha engineers have extensively researched the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects inside a room. We sent these engineers to famous theaters and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of those venues with sophisticated microphones. The data they collected is used to recreate these environments in digital sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields are created using data measured directly at the original venue; others are created from combinations of data to form unique environments for specific purposes. Of course, that only solves half of the problem. These engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your listening room, so we’ve made it possible for you to adjust the various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any source and in combination with any of the following surround sound technologies. Some are designed especially for music, and some especially for movies. Dolby Pro Logic Surround Dolby Pro Logic Surround has been used in movie theaters since the mid-seventies. It has also been available in home entertainment systems since the late eighties and continues to be a popular format for home theater systems. It uses four discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. 4 Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Pro Logic Surround encoding as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with standard analog processors. INTRODUCTION Dolby Digital is the next level of Dolby Surround sound system developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate audio coding. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby Digital provides five full range channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in total. Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system (left front, center, right front and just one surround channel), Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the three front channels. Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as mentioned left, and moreover, it can also form fewer channels, for example 2 channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2 channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby Digital in the market. English Dolby Digital Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Copyright 1992 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo Digital theater sound in your home. Wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full range channels and precise sound orientation by the digital sound processing presents listeners much excitement and realism that has never been experienced before. DTS Digital Surround DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six discrete channels of superb digital audio. The DTS technology, through intense research and development, made it possible to deliver a similar encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surroundsound entertainment. The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as “0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that are currently available for home theater systems By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS installed theater’s high quality sound in your home. Laserdisc, compact disc and DVD are home audio format within which DTS can represent its high quality multi-channel audio. (In addition to movies on laserdiscs, many exciting new multi-channel music recordings will also become available in the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.) Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the six channels of 20-bit audio onto some laserdiscs, compact discs and DVDs with considerably less data-compression. 5 INTRODUCTION CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening room is very different from a movie theater. However, Yamaha DSP technology allows you to create nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your home by compensating for the lack of presence and dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround sounds. CINEMA DSP The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Surround or DTS. Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surrounddecoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the room, letting you feel much presence as if you were watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater. Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digital-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and much surround effect in the room without losing high channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This is the most ideal home theater sound at the present time. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected, and the input signal of the source is analog, PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channels. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS DIGITAL SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected, and the input signal of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (except in 2-channels) or encoded with the DTS. 6 Getting started English GETTING STARTED Unpacking Carefully remove this unit and accessories from the box. You should find the unit itself and the following accessories. Remote controller Indoor FM Antenna AM Loop Antenna Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) User function stickers Batteries (size AA, LR6, UM-3) 7 GETTING STARTED Installing batteries in the remote controller Notes about the remote controller Battery replacement Since the remote controller will be used for many of this unit’s control operations, you should begin by installing the supplied batteries. 1. Turn the remote controller over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2. Insert the batteries (AA, LR6, UM-3 type) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Close the battery compartment cover. 2 If you find that the remote controller must be used closer to the main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with new ones. Notes ● Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries. (It is recommended to use an LR6 type to use the remote controller for a long period of time.) ● Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) ● Remove the batteries if the remote controller is not used for an extended period of time. ● If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material and contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Remote controller operation range 1 3 ROOM 2 CONTROL 4. After the batteries are inserted, press the RESET button before using the remote controller. A B 0 20 40 60 l00 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT Remote control sensor Within approximately 6 m (19.7 feet) RESET button 30° 30° Notes ● The area between the remote controller and the main unit must be clear of large obstacles. ● Do not expose the remote control sensor to strong lighting, in particular, an inverter type fluorescent lamp. Otherwise, the remote controller may not work properly. If necessary, position the main unit away from direct lighting. 8 GETTING STARTED English Controls and their functions Front panel 2 1 NATURAL SOUND 3 4 5 6 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT 8 60 2 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CT l2 28 EXT. DECODER 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 2 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 2 DVD/LD 4 L5 INPUT MODE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 1 VCR 2 S VIDEO J K LM N O MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM EDIT VIDEO L AUDIO R I C For the remote controller, refer to pages 66 to 67. UP CD VIDEO AUX 5R D 7 8 9 0AB SOURCE TV/DBS 3 4 –dB DOWN TUNING AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 5 TUNING MODE FM/AM EDIT TUNING MODE P Q FM/AM AUTO/MAN’L MONO EFGH 1 STANDBY/ON switch Press this switch to turn on the power. Press this switch again to set this unit in the standby mode. * A click from the switch and the initial rotation of the built-in fan will be heard when the power is turned on. Standby mode This unit is still using a small amount of power in this mode in order to be ready to receive infrared-signals from the remote controller. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote controller. 3 Display panel Displays a variety of information. (Refer to page 11 for details.) 4 EXT. DECODER button Press this button to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function takes priority over the INPUT SELECTOR setting. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel. The source selected with the INPUT SELECTOR knob becomes the current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated on the display panel. 5 INPUT SELECTOR Turn this knob to select the input source. The selected source will be shown on the display. 6 Master VOLUME control Simultaneously controls volume for all output sounds; front effect, main, rear, center and subwoofer. (The REC OUT level is not affected.) * The indicator on the master VOLUME control will flash when the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key on the remote controller. 7 PHONES jack Headphones can be plugged into this jack for private listening. You can listen to the sound to be output from the main speakers through headphones. When listening with headphones privately, press both SPEAKERS A and B switches to cancel both of the main speakers A and B, and turn off the digital sound field processor by pressing the EFFECT button so that no DSP program name is illuminated on the display panel. PHONES 9 GETTING STARTED 8 A/B/C/D/E button I REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector Press this button to select a group (A–E) of preset stations. Rotate this knob to select the source for recording to an MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR. This setting is independent of the INPUT SELECTOR setting, except when the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector is set to the SOURCE position. Then the INPUT SELECTOR is used to select the source for recording to the MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR. 9 SPEAKERS switches Press the switch A or B (or both) for the main speakers you will use to select them. Press the switch for the main speakers you will not use again to cancel them. On the display panel, “SPEAKERS A” and/or “SPEAKERS B” will be illuminated, depending on which main speakers are being selected. 0 Preset station number selector buttons Select a preset station number (1 to 8). A BASS EXTENSION button Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency response at the main left and right channels while maintaining overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used. B TONE BYPASS button Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone control circuitry can be used when this button is released outward (OFF). C BASS and TREBLE controls Rotate these knobs to adjust the low and high frequency response for the left and right main channels only. D BALANCE control This knob controls the sound from the main speakers only. The balance of the output volume to the left and right main speakers can be adjusted to compensate for sound imbalances caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. E MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) button Use this button to enter a station to memory. Refer to the section “Manual preset tuning” on page 44 for details. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. Refer to page 45 for details. F EDIT button This button is used to exchange the places of two preset stations with each other. G TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) button Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator is illuminated on the display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated. H FM/AM button Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. For a user who made up a dual-room audio/video system with this unit: The setting of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector controls the input source for the second room. J LEVEL button This button is used to adjust the output level of the center and rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this button (several times) to select the speaker(s). The name appears on the display. Then press the + or – button (K) to change the output level. K –/+ button Adjusts the level of the speaker(s) selected by pressing the LEVEL button. Moreover, performs setting changes and adjustments for functions selected by pressing the SET MENU button (L). L SET MENU button Press this button once or more to select the desired function in the SET MENU mode. M TUNING DOWN/UP button Used for tuning. Press the “UP” side to tune in to a higher frequency, and press the “DOWN” side to tune in to a lower frequency. N PROGRAM selector button Press this button in the or direction to select a digital sound field processing program. O EFFECT button Press this button to turn on and off the output from the center and rear speakers. The sound becomes normal 2-channel when this function is turned off. However, this does not apply to Dolby Digital or DTS. The signals at all channels will be distributed to the main channels and output from the main speakers, even if the output from the center and rear speakers are turned off, when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded. P VIDEO AUX terminals Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a camcorder to these terminals. A video unit with a S video output terminal can be connected to the S VIDEO terminal to obtain a high resolution picture. The source can be selected with the INPUT SELECTOR and REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector. Q INPUT MODE button Press this button to select how input signals are received from sources that output two or more types of signals. The “AUTO”, “DTS” and “ANALOG” modes are available. Refer to page 38 for details. <China, Singapore and General models only> The “AUTO”, “D.D.RF”, “DTS”, “DGTL” and “ANALOG” modes are available for DVD/LD sources. 10 GETTING STARTED English Display panel 1 2 3 DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP SPEAKERS A B 4 5 6 MEMORY ENHANCED MOVIE THEATER 12 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE DISCO JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT CHURCH CONCERT HALL AUTO 7 8 1 indicators Either “dts” indicators will be illuminated when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. A red “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a compact disc or laserdisc encoded with DTS. An orange “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a DVD encoded with DTS. An orange “dts” indicator may be illuminated when playing a laserdisc encoded with DTS after a video-CD or DVD on a DVD/LD combi-player. STEREO DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 0 20 SLEEP 100 90 A B 7 MEMORY indicator A flashing MEMORY indicator means a station can be saved, as explained in the following: Press the MEMORY button. The MEMORY indicator will flash about 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, program the displayed station to memory by using the A/B/C/D/E and the preset station number selector buttons. 8 DSP program indicators 2 Multi-information display This display shows the current DSP program and the status of adjustments and setting changes. Several statuses can be viewed at one time. The current station frequency and band (AM or FM) will also appear when the tuner source input mode is selected. The name of the selected DSP program will be illuminated in the following cases. • When the tuner is selected as the input source. • When a DSP program parameter is selected or adjusted. • When the DSP program No. 8, 9 or the subprogram “Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected. There is no illumination here when no DSP program is selected 3 Input source indicators 9 AUTO indicator One of the arrows for these indicators will be illuminated depending on which source is selected. This indicator will be illuminated during the automatic tuning mode. 4 0 STEREO indicator DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators The DIGITAL indicator will be illuminated when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the source encoded with Dolby Digital are not 2-channels. The PRO LOGIC indicator will be illuminated when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on. 5 DSP indicator This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. This indicator will be illuminated when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is received. A Signal-level indicator This indicator shows the signal level of the received station. If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases. B SLEEP indicator This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 6 SPEAKERS A/B indicators One of these indicators will be illuminated depending on which main speakers are selected. Both indicators will be illuminated when both speakers A and B are selected. 11 PREPARATION Speaker setup m Setting up your speaker system This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field quality with a full five-speaker system setup, using a pair of main speakers to output main source sounds, a pair of effect speakers to generate the sound field plus one center speaker for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a fivespeaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one pair of effect speakers for the sound field will still provide impressive ambience and effects, however, and may be a good way to begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to the fivespeaker system later. Use of the center dialog speaker is recommended When playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic decoded, or playing back a source which contains center-channel signals with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are output from the center channel. Therefore, if you want to maximize the performance of your Audio/Video home theater system, it is recommended that you use a center channel speaker. If, for some reason, it is not practical to use a center speaker, it is possible to enjoy the movie without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded. You may wish to choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, which has its own built-in power amplifier. m Speakers and speaker placement Your full five-speaker system will require two speaker pairs: the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers) and the REAR SPEAKERS, plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may also be using a SUBWOOFER. The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models and have enough power handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER and REAR SPEAKERS. Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the ordinary position. Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position. They should be nearly 1.8m above the floor. Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically shielded speaker.) If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is not so critical because low bass tones are not highly directional. Main speaker Subwoofer 12 Center speaker Rear speaker PREPARATION English m Speaker system configurations 4 Speaker System 5 Speaker System The recommended system for enjoying Audio/Video sources. By the use of a center speaker, center channel sounds (dialog, vocals etc.) are precisely localized. 1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “LRG” or “SML”. (See page 29.) Basic system. You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding a pair of rear speakers to a basic stereo speaker system. However, center channel sounds must be output from the left and right main speakers. 1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “NONE”. (See page 29.) 13 PREPARATION Connections Caution: Plug in this unit and other components after all connections are completed. All connections must be correct, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also refer to the owner’s manual for each of your components. Audio/video source equipment ● ● Use RCA type pin plug cables for audio/video units with the exception described later. The output (or input) terminals of YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 3, 4, etc. on the rear panel must be connected to the same-numbered terminals of this unit. m Basic connections of audio units GND OUTPUT Turntable (U.S.A. model) CD player S VIDEO VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO OUTPUT 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT MD recorder, Tape deck, etc. IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD LINE OUT LINE IN GND VCR 1 4 OUT OUT ( REC ) FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER (*1) CENTER COAXIAL S VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO CD (*1): GND terminal (For turntable use) Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases better results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected. 14 DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL MONITOR OUT : Indicates the direction of signals. PREPARATION AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT (U.S.A. model) AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO S VIDEO 1 TV/DBS CD AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN 3 IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND VCR 1 4 OUT OUT ( REC ) FM ANT TV/Satellite tuner DVD/LD PHONO AM ANT LD player or DVD player English m Basic connections of video units MAIN Video cassette recorder 1 IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER S VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL Video cassette recorder 2 VIDEO CD DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL MONITOR OUT TV monitor VIDEO IN VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel) These terminals are used to connect a video input source such as a camcorder. PAL/NTSC switch (China and General models only) This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL television formats. Set this switch to the position for the format your TV monitor employs. VIDEO AUX S VIDEO IN S VIDEO VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL OUT PAL NTSC L AUDIO R PAL/NTSC switch AUDIO OUT R PAL: R AUDIO OUT L L VIDEO OUT VIDEO S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO : S-video cable (Refer to page 20 for details about the S VIDEO terminal.) Camcorder Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the PAL format. Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. NTSC: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the NTSC format. Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. Note Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same format that your TV monitor employs, otherwise a picture will not be played back normally. 15 PREPARATION m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to only analog audio signal terminals of this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 38 for details.) * However, if you connect an MD recorder or DAT to this unit’s OPTICAL TAPE/MD IN and OUT terminals, it can record input sources connected to this unit’s OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. If your CD player, MD recorder, LD player, DVD player, TV/satellite tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL or OPTICAL, or both terminals. Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are necessary, especially for an LD player, a DVD player or a CD player to send signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to this unit. To make an optical digital connection between this unit and an external unit, remove the cover from each optical terminal, and then connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not function correctly. <U.S.A., Canada and Australia models> (U.S.A. model) VIDEO S VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN CD player ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND VCR 1 4 OUT OUT ( REC ) COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER S VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO CD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT DVD/LD OPTICAL DIGITAL IN MD recorder, DAT, etc. : Optical fiber cable : Coaxial cable 16 CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT MONITOR OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT LD player or DVD player OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT TV/Satellite tuner PREPARATION ● ● Digital audio signals will not be output from the ZONE 2 OUT AUDIO SIGNAL terminals of this unit. All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. English Notes ● When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to both terminals of the same name. ● Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from dust. ● In order to make this unit perform successful DTS-decoding, the DTS bitstream must not be altered, manipulated or corrupted in the process of sending the DTS bitstream from the DIGITAL OUT terminal of an external unit to a digital signal input terminal of this unit. <China, Singapore and General models> (General model) VIDEO FREQUENCY STEP 50kHz 9kHz 1 I00kHz I0kHz FM AM TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT CD player S VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD VCR 1 4 GND OUT OUT ( REC ) COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER S VIDEO DIGITAL RF SIGNAL OPTICAL VIDEO DVD/LD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT : Optical fiber cable CD DIGITAL CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL OPTICAL DIGITAL IN MD recorder, DAT, etc. MONITOR OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT LD player or DVD player OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT TV/Satellite tuner : Coaxial cable 17 PREPARATION m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL RF output of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player <For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models> If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal, it can be connected to this unit by using an RF demodulator (separate purchase). First, connect the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal input terminal of the RF demodulator. Next, connect the coaxial digital signal output terminal of the RF demodulator to the COAXIAL digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for sending audio signals of an LD source encoded with Dolby Digital to this unit. It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal stereo (or monaural). You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD source with DTS decoded. When these connections are completed, set the input mode of the DVD/LD source to “AUTO”, and you will hear sounds decoded with Dolby Digital even if signals are input to both COAXIAL and OPTICAL digital signal input terminals of this unit. This is because signals input to the COAXIAL terminal take priority over signals input to the OPTICAL terminal. Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode. Notes ● If, for example, you play a CD on the DVD/LD/CD combiplayer, there is no input to the COAXIAL terminal, so the signals input to the OPTICAL terminal take priority. In this case, switch off the RF demodulator to listen to CD sound without interference. However, if your RF demodulator is the Yamaha model APD-1, you do not have to switch it off. ● When you want to play an LD source encoded with Dolby Digital without decoding Dolby Digital, you must switch off the power of the RF demodulator. DVD/LD PHONO 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND VCR 1 4 DVD/LD/CD combi-player, etc. OUT OUT ( REC ) ANALOG OUT FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL RF OUT OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER COAXIAL OPTICAL CD DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL (U.S.A. model) DOLBY DIGITAL RF IN COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT RF demodulator 18 PREPARATION English <For China, Singapore and General models> You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD source with DTS decoded. If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal, connect it to this unit’s DIGITAL RF SIGNAL input terminal. Audio signals of an LD source encoded with the Dolby Digital are input to this unit by this connection. * To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital decoded, set the input mode of DVD/LD to “AUTO” or “D.D.RF”. (Refer to page 38 for details.) Note DOLBY DIGITAL RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. To record a source played back on the DVD/LD/CD combi-player, it must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and analog audio signal input terminals of this unit. It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal stereo (or monaural). DVD/LD/CD combi-player DIGITAL OUT ANALOG OUT DOLBY DIGITAL RF OUT (General model) FREQUENCY STEP 50kHz 1 I00kHz I0kHz FM DVD/LD PHONO 9kHz AM TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD VCR 1 4 GND OUT OUT ( REC ) FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER DIGITAL RF SIGNAL DVD/LD OPTICAL CD DIGITAL CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL 19 PREPARATION m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals Notes about the Video superimpose If your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. and your monitor are equipped with “S” video terminals, connect them to this unit’s S VIDEO terminals, and connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video input of your monitor. With this connection, you can play back and record high quality pictures. Otherwise, connect the “composite” video terminals from your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. to the VIDEO terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the “composite” video input of your monitor. ● ● Note If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective output terminals. If you watch a video source that is connected to both S VIDEO and VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display information are output from only the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal. When no video signal is input to either S VIDEO or VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display information are output from both S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals with a color background. * For China and General models, if the PAL/NTSC switch on the rear panel is set to “PAL”, nothing will be output from either S VIDEO MONITOR OUT or VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal in this case. S VIDEO terminals This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition to standard type VIDEO terminals. S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison with S VIDEO terminals, standard type VIDEO terminals transmit “composite” video signals. LD player or DVD player VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Video cassette recorder 1 VIDEO S VIDEO DVD/LD TV/Satellite tuner S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT TV/DBS IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT ZONE 2 OUT S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO IN S VIDEO Video cassette recorder 2 TV monitor : S-video cable 20 PREPARATION This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels) for inputting signals from an external decoder of a future format to this unit. To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these terminals, press the EXT. DECODER button on the front panel so that “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display. By doing so, the signals input to these terminals are sent to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals and OUTPUT terminals of this unit. Notes ● When signals input to these terminals are selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. ● The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input to these terminals. The setting of “5. MAIN LEVEL” is effective. (Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details.) ● The adjustments of the output level of the center speaker, rear speakers and subwoofer are effective when the signals input to these terminals are selected as the input source. (Refer to pages 50 to 51 for details.) English m Connecting an external decoder of a future format to this unit (U.S.A. model) VIDEO S VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND 4 SURROUND OUT OUT OUT MAIN OUT External decoder VCR 1 ( REC ) FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND CENTER OUT OUT GND SUBWOOFER OUT EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER COAXIAL S VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO CD DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL MONITOR OUT 21 PREPARATION Speakers Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear of this unit. Subwoofer system Rear speakers Left Right (U.S.A. model) IN REMOTE CONTROL OUTPUT CENTER REAR OUT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SPEAKERS CENTER REAR SET BEFORE POWER ON ( SURROUND ) CENTER : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER Center speaker SUB WOOFER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER ( SURROUND ) CAUTION SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING. MAIN OUTPUT A A B B MAIN Right Left Right Main speakers B Left Main speakers A How to Connect: Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with the wire of the proper gauge (keep as short as possible). If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct. That is the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Caution Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit or the speakers, or both. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) <Except Singapore model> Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal. 2 1 3 22 ➀ Loosen the knob. ➁ Insert the bare wire. [Remove approx. 5mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] ➂ Tighten the knob and secure the wire. PREPARATION Note on a subwoofer connection: One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when reproducing discrete signals. When using a subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier, and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer. With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer are in the same unit. Such a subwoofer needs only the connection between the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit and the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer. (Refer to page 24 for details about the SUBWOOFER terminal.) English Note on main speaker connections: m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED: The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (U.S.A. model) SPEAKERS CENTER REAR Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets. (Upper position) Center: <U.S.A. and Canada models> The impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or higher. <Australia, China, Singapore and General models> The impedance of the speaker must be 6Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher. Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON ( SURROUND ) CENTER : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER AC OUTLETS SWITCHED I20V 60Hz I00W MAX.TOTAL A B (Lower position) Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Main: <Except Canada model> If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher. <For Canada model only> The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. 23 PREPARATION m To drive main, center and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers The speaker connections described on page 22 are fine for most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to drive main, center and/or rear speakers with your existing amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit. 1 These terminals are for main channel line output. If you drive main speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the built-in amplifier. * Output signals from the MAIN terminals are affected by the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, BASS EXTENSION button and the TONE BYPASS button. 2 34 IN REMOTE CONTROL OUTPUT CENTER REAR OUT MAIN terminals CEN 2 SUBWOOFER terminal SUB WOOFER When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to this terminal. Low frequencies distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are output from this terminal. (The cut-off frequency of this terminal is 90 Hz.) Signals of LFE (low frequency effect) generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also output if they are assigned to this terminal. ( SURROUND ) CAUTION SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAIN OUTPUT A 3 CENTER terminal MAIN This terminal is for center channel line output. If you drive a center speaker with an external power amplifier, connect the input terminal of the external amplifier to this terminal. There is no connection to this terminal when you use the built-in amplifier. B 1 4 REAR (SURROUND) terminals These terminals are for rear channel line output. If you drive rear speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the built-in amplifier. Notes • Output level of signals from all of these terminals are adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel or MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote controller. • If an external power amplifier is connected to the MAIN, CENTER or REAR output terminals, do not use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals (MAIN, CENTER or REAR). 24 PREPARATION English Antennas ● ● Each antenna should be connected to the designated terminals correctly, as shown in the following figure. Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality only with the indoor antennas, the use of an outdoor antenna may result in improvement. Outdoor AM antenna Indoor FM antenna (included) Outdoor FM antenna (U.S.A. model) AM loop antenna (included) PHONO 1 CD 3 AM ANT IN ( PLAY ) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter TAPE/MD GND 4 OUT ( REC ) 75-ohm coaxial cable FM ANT MAIN 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT SUB WOOFER 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter COAXIAL CD 300-ohm flat ribbon cable CENTER DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DIGITAL SIGNAL Ground m Connecting the AM loop antenna 1. Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole. 2. Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and GND terminals. 4. Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. Loop antenna 3. Return the tab back to the original position to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 1 3 Antenna stand 5. Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. 2 Notes ● The AM loop antenna should be placed apart from the main unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall. ● The AM loop antenna should be kept connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 25 PREPARATION m Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. GND terminal For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the GND terminal to a good ground. A good ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Note Do not use an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. m Optional outdoor AM antenna If this unit is placed in steel buildings or an area far from broadcasting stations, it may be necessary to install an outside long wire antenna. m Optional outdoor FM antenna Consult your dealer or authorized service center about the best method of selecting and erecting an outdoor FM antenna. The choice of the flat ribbon cable is also important. Flat ribbon cable performs well electrically, and is cheaper and somewhat easier to handle when routing it through windows and around rooms. Coaxial cable is more expensive, does a much better job of minimizing interference, is less prone to the effects of weather and close-by metal objects, and is nearly as good a signal conductor as flat ribbon cable. Coaxial cable is somewhat more difficult to install at the point where the cable enters the building. If coaxial cable is selected, make sure the antenna is designed to be used with this type of cable. * Use a 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (not included) or a 75-ohm antenna adapter (not included) for connections. 300-ohm flat ribbon cable 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter 75-ohm coaxial cable 300-ohm flat ribbon cable 26 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm antenna adapter Notes for FM antenna installation ● To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise, locate the antenna as far from heavy traffic as possible. ● Keep the flat ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as possible. Do not bundle or roll up an excess of the cable. ● The antenna should be at least two meters (6.6 feet) from reinforced concrete walls or metal structures. PREPARATION English Plugging in this unit • After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord into an AC outlet. SPEAKERS NTER REAR • Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is not to be used for a long period of time. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON To AC outlet ( SURROUND ) CENTER : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER VOLTAGE SELECTOR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER AL FOR CORRECT SETTING. AC OUTLETS SWITCHED A (*2) B I00W MAX. TOTAL (*1) (General model) (*1): (*2): AC OUTLET(S) Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) (U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models) .......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS (Australia model).................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET Use these to connect the power cords of your components to this unit. The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON switch or the remote controller’s SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys. These outlets will supply power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is 100W. 27 PREPARATION On screen display If you connect your VCR, LD player, video monitor, etc. to this unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s capability to display program titles, parameter data and information for various setting changes and adjustments on your video monitor screen. This information will be superimposed over the video image. If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the information will be displayed over a blue colored background. Selecting a type of display You can change the type of display showing various information on the monitor screen by pressing the ON SCREEN display key on the remote controller. Press this key to change the screen to a full or simple display, or no display at all. A B C ON SCREEN REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER (Example) Full display Note: The program titles, parameter data and other information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit. Simple display Goes off after being displayed for several seconds. Notes ● When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET MENU mode, or adjusting the speaker balance by using the test tone, information is fully displayed on the monitor screen even if another type of display is currently selected. ● Information displayed on the monitor screen in this way cannot be recorded by a VCR. 28 PREPARATION English Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU” mode) The following functions control the output signals to the speakers in your audio system. When speaker connections are all completed, select a proper position on each function to maximize the performance of your speaker system. * For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 56 to 59. 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL m Function description 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE Preset position: LRG Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LRG: When your center speaker is approximately the same size as the main speakers. SML: When you use a center speaker that is smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the center channel are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). NONE: When you do not have a center speaker. The center channel sound will be output from the left and right main speakers. LARGE: If your rear speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear speaker in parallel. In this position, full range signals are output from the rear speakers. SMALL: If your rear speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). 29 PREPARATION 3. MAIN SPEAKER 5. MAIN LEVEL Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE Choices: Normal/–10dB Preset position: Normal LARGE: If your main speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels are output from the main speakers. SMALL: If your main speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). 4. LFE/BASS OUT Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH Preset position: SW MAIN: If your system does not include a subwoofer. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels, signals from the LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed from other channels are output from the main speakers. SW/BOTH: Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals at LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed from other channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals. When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN SPEAKER”, in the SW position, no signal is distributed from the main channels to the SUBWOOFER terminals, however in the BOTH position, low bass signals from the main channels are output to both of the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER terminals. Note The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT” have no effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit. 30 Normal: Normally, select this position. –10dB: If the volume levels to the center and/or rear speakers are lower than the level to the main speakers even though they are adjusted to maximum. The volume level to the main speakers are decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker output level balance properly. PREPARATION English m Changing selections Refer to the display panel or the monitor screen when changing the selections. 2 1 Set to “SET MENU”. ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 LEVEL PARAMETER 2, 3 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 3 4 4 L5 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM SET MENU 1 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT TV/DBS VIDEO AUX SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU TUNER PHONO VCR 1 MASTER VOLUME TV VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO MUTE L AUDIO R VCR STANDBY 3 When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 3 Use one of the buttons figured below to select the desired position. Remote control Front panel Remote control LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU or SET MENU 1 Turn on the power of this unit. (If necessary, turn on the power of the monitor to display information.) Remote control Front panel SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY/ON or DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 SPEAKERS A Changes. 2 Select the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” by using one of the following methods. Front panel LEVEL Remote control 4 Follow the same procedure for “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER”, “4. LFE/BASS OUT” and/or “5. MAIN LEVEL”. First select the function by following step 2, and then select the proper position by following step 3. SET MENU Press once or more. Press once or more. DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 SPEAKERS A 31 PREPARATION Speaker balance adjustment This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test tone generator. After the adjustments, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder and the DTS decoder. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote controller. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 1 2 V-AUX HALL NATURAL SOUND 7 6 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CT 8 EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 TREBLE 0 l l 2 3 ON OFF 3 4 4 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 2 3 4 5 DVD/LD TV/DBS 3 4 5 VIDEO AUX 4 L5 VCR 1 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 LEVEL PARAMETER INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 4 5 TUNING MODE FM/AM CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT SET MENU CD TUNER PHONO 2 PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 5 1 4 MUTE VCR STANDBY 5 Front panel VOLUME Front panel l6 20 BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS l2 28 8 4 40 2 60 Set to the “OFF ( 0 –dB Set to the “∞” position. 2 6 Turn on the power. Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the remote controller to the PARAMETER position. Remote control Front panel Remote control SYSTEM POWER ON PARAMETER or STANDBY/ON )”. SET MENU 3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding indicator will be illuminated. 7 Press the TEST key on the remote controller to enter the test mode. Front panel SPEAKERS A Remote control B TEST * Both speakers A and B can be selected. Front panel 4 BASS 0 l l 2 TREBLE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 4 4 L5 Set to the “0” position. 32 CONTINUED 2 3 5R PREPARATION English MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR 0 l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT PARAMETER EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY 10 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CT LEVEL 8 EDIT TUNING MODE FM/AM SET MENU –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE SLEEP ON SCREEN MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 DVD/LD 2 3 3 4 4 L5 AUTO/MAN’L MONO 5 R TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO SYSTEM POWER ON PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO MASTER VOLUME TV L AUDIO R MUTE 9 8 VCR 8 STANDBY 9 Turn up the volume. Remote control Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound output level of the left main speaker and the right main speaker are the same. Front panel BALANCE 0 l l MUTE 2 2 3 3 4 4 L5 You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes as shown below. Main (L) Center Main (R) 10 5R Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers so that they become almost the same as the main speakers. How to adjust: Pressing the + or – key adjusts the level to the speaker (except the main speakers) currently outputting the test tone. * Pressing the + key raises and the – key lowers the level. * While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. Remote control Rear (R) Rear (L) * The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor screen by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. EFFECT LEVEL CENTER + 2dB * If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test tone by pressing the or key once or more so that “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the display. * While holding the or key pressed, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. * “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected, “R SUR.” shows the right rear speaker, and “L SUR.” shows the left rear speaker. * The output level of the selected speaker can be adjusted by the + or – key. Remote control If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the center channel test tone from the left and right main speakers. CONTINUED 33 PREPARATION 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 11 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST key once again to cancel the test tone. Remote control TEST Disappears. Notes Once you have completed these adjustments, you can adjust the sound level on your audio system by using the VOLUME control (or the MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote controller) only. ● If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their volume controls to obtain proper balance. ● If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, in step 10, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting the function “5. MAIN LEVEL” in the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position. ● 34 11 English BASIC OPERATION Playing a source REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A 4 2 CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD 4 TV/DBS NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME VCR 2 INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT C 8 4 40 PRESET PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT V-AUX 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 2 4 5 4 5 DVD/LD UP INPUT MODE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 TUNER PHONO VCR 1 5 R DOWN TUNING CHURCH JAZZ CLUB CD VIDEO AUX 4 L5 SOURCE TV/DBS 3 HALL –dB AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 A/B/C/D/E EXT. DECODER TUNING MODE FM/AM PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL 2 3 PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 1 4 Front panel VOLUME l6 20 l2 28 8 Select an input source. (For video sources, turn on the TV/monitor.) The selected source is shown on the display panel and the monitor screen. 4 40 Front panel 2 60 Remote control 0 –dB Set to the “∞” position. 2 DVD/LD or Turn on the power. Front panel Remote control SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY/ON or 3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding indicator will be illuminated. SPEAKERS A DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 Front panel Name of the selected input source SPEAKERS To select the source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals, press the EXT. DECODER button. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display. (Refer to page 37 for details.) A B * Both speakers A and B can be selected. CONTINUED 35 BASIC OPERATION REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A CD TUNER 5 7 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C 5 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 PRESET PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO 20 40 60 0 dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM PS l00 PTY RT CT 28 8 60 2 V-AUX HALL AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 2 5 DVD/LD 2 3 4 5 3 4 4 L5 5 R TUNING MODE FM/AM 8 –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CD TUNER PHONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 0 A/B/C/D/E PHONES A/B/C/D/E 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP PROGRAM 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU 7 SLEEP ON SCREEN 8 8 SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 5 The current input mode is also shown for a source that inputs two or more types of signals to this unit. To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently selected source on the remote controller. (Refer to page 38 for details on switching the input mode.) Front panel 6 Play the source. (Refer to page 43 for details on tuning.) 7 Front panel Remote control VOLUME Remote control l6 20 MASTER VOLUME l2 INPUT MODE DVD/LD 28 8 or 4 40 or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB Adjust the output level. TAPE/MD TV/DBS CD V-AUX TUNER VCR 1 PHONO VCR 2 SPEAKERS A Input mode 36 DVD/LD 8 Adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, etc. (Refer to page 42) and use the digital sound field processor. (Refer to pages 47–49.) BASIC OPERATION Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel or the STANDBY key on the remote controller to enter the standby mode. Front panel Remote control STANDBY/ON or STANDBY To select the source connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. Press the EXT. DECODER button. “EXT. DECODER” will appear on the display. Front panel Remote control Notes on input source selection ● Note that selecting an input source means that the source which is connected to the corresponding input terminals on the rear panel is selected. * To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX terminals on the front panel, select “V-AUX”. ● The setting of the EXT. DECODER button cannot be canceled by selecting another input source. To cancel it, press the EXT. DECODER button again so that “EXT. DECODER” goes off from the display. ● If you select a video input source without canceling the setting of the EXT. DECODER button, you will see the picture of the video input source and hear the sound of the source selected by the EXT. DECODER button. ● If a different audio source is selected with the input selector keys on the remote controller while enjoying a video source, the sound from the newly selected audio source is heard, but the picture from the video source can still be seen. ● When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the same input source was last selected will be automatically recalled. ● If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is not operating correctly, “INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display. English When you finish using this unit EXT. DEC. or EXT. DECODER Note The input source selected in this way has priority over any other input source already selected. To select another input source, press the EXT. DECODER button again so that “EXT. DECODER” goes off from the display, and then use the INPUT SELECTOR. 37 BASIC OPERATION m Switching the input mode This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit. <U.S.A., Canada and Australia models> The following three input modes are provided. AUTO: DTS: This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is selected even though other signals are input at the same time. 1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signals (PCM) 2. Analog input signal (ANALOG) ANALOG In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even though digital signals are input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals instead of digital input signals. * For CD and DVD/LD sources, if digital signals are input from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. <China, Singapore and General models> v For CD, TAPE/MD and TV/DBS sources: v For DVD/LD source: The following three input modes are provided. The following five input modes are provided. AUTO: AUTO: This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power to this unit. In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. 1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signals (PCM) 2. Analog input signal (ANALOG) 1. Dolby Digital RF signal (DOLBY DIGITAL) 2. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signals (PCM) 3. Analog input signal (ANALOG) * For a CD source, if digital signals are input from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. D.D.RF: DTS: DTS: In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is selected even though other signals are input at the same time. In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are selected even though other signals are input at the same time. ANALOG DGTL: In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even though digital signals are input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals instead of digital input signals. In this mode, only digital input signals (DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS or PCM) are selected even though other types of signals are input at the same time. In this mode, only Dolby Digital RF signal is selected. ANALOG In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even though other types of signals are input at the same time. 38 BASIC OPERATION Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS Select the DTS mode when playing an LD or CD source encoded with DTS. (Red “dts” indicator is illuminated on the display panel.) If the “AUTO” mode is selected, a noise may be heard just after playback begins. Do not play these sources in the ANALOG mode because only background noise will be output from the speakers. ● This unit is automatically locked in the DTS decoding mode when playing a CD or LD source encoded with DTS in the AUTO mode to prevent background noise in future operation. The red “dts” indicator will be flashing. In this mode, no sound will be heard if a disc with normal digital signals (PCM) is played from a CD or LD source. To play back the disc normally, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel, or, the input selector key for the current source on the remote controller. English Notes on input mode selection ● The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with function “12. TV/DBS INPUT” in the SET MENU mode. This unit will be automatically set to the selected input mode when the power is turned on. ● Set the input mode to the following mode to play a DVD/LD source encoded with Dolby Digital. U.S.A., Canada and Australia models: AUTO China, Singapore and General models: AUTO or D.D.RF ● Select the ANALOG mode to play a normal 2-channel source with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program. ● The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD players in the following situation: The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, then disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital input signal was selected again. ● The input mode cannot be changed for PHONO, TUNER, VCR 1, VCR 2 and VIDEO AUX sources because only analog signals are used. ● The present input mode appears on the front display and monitor screen when the input source is changed to DVD/LD, CD, TAPE/MD or TV/DBS, or the input mode is changed. The present input signal is also shown on the monitor screen when the input mode is changed to AUTO, as shown below. ● * However, the present input signal will not be shown when the input mode is switched during the speaker test mode. Only AUTO will be displayed. 39 BASIC OPERATION Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD) m Recording the playing source to tape (or MD) REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A 2 3 CD TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD 2 TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT PRESET 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT HALL EXT. DECODER 2 60 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 2 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 3 4 5 DVD/LD 2 3 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 4 L5 TUNING MODE FM/AM 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VCR 1 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 0 PHONES A/B/C/D/E V-AUX dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM PROGRAM TAPE/MD 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 1 SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 MUTE VCR STANDBY Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller. 1 Set the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector to the SOURCE position. 3 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up to confirm the input source. (Refer to page 43 for details on tuning.) Front panel Front panel REC OUT/ZONE 2 DVD/LD TV/DBS SOURCE TUNER VIDEO AUX VCR 1 Remote control CD VOLUME PHONO TAPE/MD l6 20 VCR 2 MASTER VOLUME l2 28 8 4 40 2 Select the source you want to record. Front panel Remote control or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB CD 4 40 or Begin recording to the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) or VCR connected to this unit. BASIC OPERATION English m Recording a source to tape (or MD) while listening to (or watching) another source The source (except for “SOURCE”) that is selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector can be recorded to a tape deck (MD recorder) and/or VCR, regardless of the INPUT SELECTOR setting. REC/PAUSE 3, 5, 6 A/B 3 TAPE/MD A CD TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 3, 5, 6 TV/DBS VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 VCR 2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 C DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A PS l00 8 PTY RT CT 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER PRESET 2 60 A/B/C/D/E V-AUX 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY TUNING MODE FM/AM EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE HALL AUTO/MAN’L MONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 5 DVD/LD 2 3 4 5 REC OUT/ZONE 2 4 L5 5 R SOURCE TV/DBS VIDEO AUX LEVEL SET MENU CD TUNER PHONO VCR 1 VIDEO AUX EFFECT PROGRAM S VIDEO VIDEO 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 TAPE/MD VCR 2 2 L AUDIO R 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL 1 PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 MUTE VCR STANDBY Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller. 1 4 Select the source you want to record. Begin recording on the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) or VCR. REC OUT/ZONE 2 DVD/LD SOURCE CD TUNER TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 5 PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 2 3 Play the source. The sound and/or picture of the recording can be monitored by selecting the tape deck (or VCR) with the INPUT SELECTOR. Front panel Select the source with the INPUT SELECTOR and adjust the VOLUME control to check the sound output. Remote control TAPE/MD or Remote control Front panel or 6 CD Selecting another source to enjoy with the INPUT SELECTOR will not effect the recording. VOLUME l6 20 MASTER VOLUME l2 28 8 4 40 or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB 41 BASIC OPERATION Notes on recording ● The VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, the BASS EXTENSION button and the settings of DSP have no effect on the material being recorded. ● Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only a S video (or only a composite video) signal on your VCR. ● A source that is connected to this unit between optical digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR other than the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) connected to the OPTICAL TAPE/MD OUT terminal of this unit. ● ● ● A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded. Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe on copyright laws. <For China, Singapore and General models only> Dolby Digital RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR. To record an LD source, the LD player must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and/or analog audio signal input terminals of this unit. If you play back a video source that uses scramble or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may be a case that display information superimposed on the picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to those signals. Sound control m Adjusting the BALANCE control Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by speaker location or listening room conditions. m Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE controls BASS 0 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 2 TREBLE 0 l l l 2 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 2 3 3 4 4 L5 5R Note This control is effective only for the sound from the main speakers. m Using the BASS EXTENSION button Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency response at the main left and right channels while maintaining overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used. BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS BASS : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counterclockwise to decrease) the low frequency response. TREBLE : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter clockwise to decrease) the high frequency response. Note These controls are effective only for the sound from the main speakers. m Using the TONE BYPASS button Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone control circuitry can be used when this button is released outward (OFF). BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 42 5 BASIC OPERATION English Tuning Basic operation Quick automatic-search tuning (automatic tuning) is effective when the station signals are strong with no interference. However, manual tuning can be used during less-than-ideal conditions. 1 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS TREBLE 0 l l l B 2 2 3 ON OFF 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 3 4 4 L5 5 R DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 3 4 m Automatic tuning 1 2 m Manual tuning 1 Select “TUNER” as the input source. Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be illuminated. 2 FM/AM Select “TUNER” as the input source. Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be illuminated. FM/AM or 3 3 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN’L MONO 4 or Press the “UP” side once to tune in to a higher frequency. Press the “DOWN” side once to tune in to a lower frequency. DOWN TUNING TUNING MODE Turn the “AUTO” indicator off. AUTO/MAN’L MONO 4 Tune to the desired station manually. DOWN TUNING UP UP * Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. * Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station. * Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station because the signals are weak. Note Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the reception to monaural to increase the signal quality. 43 BASIC OPERATION Preset tuning m Manual preset tuning This unit can store station frequencies selected by the tuning operation. With this function, you can recall any desired station only by selecting the preset station number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored. NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 2 2 3 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 2 5 DVD/LD 3 4 4 L5 5 R DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL VIDEO AUX SET MENU EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 2, 1 4, 2 3 To store stations 1 2 To recall a preset station 1 Tune to a station. (Refer to the previous page for the tuning procedure.) Select the group of preset stations. A/B/C/D/E Select a group (A – E) of preset stations. A/B/C/D/E 2 3 Select the preset station number. MEMORY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM Flashes on and off for about 5 seconds. 4 Select a preset station number (1 to 8) where you want to program the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off from the display. 1 2 3 4 5 6 STEREO SPEAKERS A 7 8 DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 AUTO 0 20 100 Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A1. * In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8. * You can program more stations to the preset station numbers on other groups in the same way by selecting other groups in step 2. 44 Notes A new setting can be programmed in place of the former one. • For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. • Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed data from being lost even if this unit is set to the standby mode or the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to a temporary power failure. If, however, the power is cut for about two weeks, the memory may be deleted. If so, it can be re-programmed by simply following the Preset tuning steps. BASIC OPERATION You can make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations. With this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and stores FM stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual preset tuning method on page 44. NATURAL SOUND English m Automatic preset tuning CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS TREBLE 0 l l l B 2 2 3 ON OFF 3 4 2 5 2 3 4 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 2 3 4 4 L5 5 R DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO 2 1 To store stations 1 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB VIDEO L AUDIO R 3 If you want to store the first received station to the desired preset station number. FM/AM If, for example, you want to store the first received station to C5, select “C5” by using the A/B/C/D/E button and the preset station number selector buttons after pressing the MEMORY button in step 2. Then press the TUNING button. The first received station is stored to C5, and next stations to C6, C7 ... sequentially. If stations are stored up to E8, the automatic preset tuning is finished automatically. Press and hold for more than 3 seconds MEMORY When the automatic preset tuning is finished The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on page 44. MAN’L/AUTO FM To recall a preset station STEREO SPEAKERS DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on page 44. A recalled station is shown by the frequency on the display. VCR 2 MEMORY A AUTO 0 20 100 Flashes 3 DOWN TUNING UP To tune to higher frequencies, press the “UP” side once. To tune to lower frequencies, press the “DOWN” side once. * If the TUNING button is not pressed, in a while, the automatic preset tuning begins automatically toward higher frequencies. Notes ● You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM station manually by simply following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on page 44. ● If the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, the search will be finished automatically after searching all frequencies. ● With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural manually and program it by following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on page 44. The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed. Received stations are programmed to A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially. * If more than 8 stations are received, they are also programmed to the preset station numbers on other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. 45 BASIC OPERATION m Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below. NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 2 5 4 L5 5 R Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the method of “To recall a preset station” on page 44). TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL UP SET MENU INPUT MODE VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 2, 4 Example) If you want to exchange the preset stations on E1 and A5 with each other. 1 DVD/LD 3 4 DOWN TUNING AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB 4 EDIT 2 EDIT MEMORY Flashes. 3 SPEAKERS A DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 MEMORY 0 20 100 Recall the preset station on A5 by following the same method with step 1. Shows the exchange of stations is completed. MEMORY Flashes. 46 BASIC OPERATION English Using digital sound field processor (DSP) This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments. In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic Surround or DTS. This unit has 10 programs for digital sound field processing; 5 programs for Audio sources and 5 programs for Audio/Video sources. In addition, some programs have two subprograms. All programs contain parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste. For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 52 to 55. Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP) STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 PRESET V-AUX 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 HALL 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 3 4 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 4 L5 TUNING MODE FM/AM 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 A/B/C/D/E VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU 2 SLEEP ON SCREEN 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “Playing a source” on pages 35 to 36. 2 When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller: If no program name is illuminated on the display panel, press the EFFECT button to turn on the digital sound field processor so that a name of a DSP program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen. Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the PARAMETER position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. EFFECT PARAMETER SET MENU CONTINUED 47 BASIC OPERATION DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO PS l00 PRESET dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 V-AUX PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 HALL 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 4 L5 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU 3 VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO DVD/LD 3 4 TUNING MODE FM/AM REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 A/B/C/D/E PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU 3 3 SLEEP ON SCREEN 3 MASTER VO UME Select a program that is suitable for the source. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller: a) PROGRAM HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 Press once or more. 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST 0 b) For the programs No. 8, 9 and 10 only, you can select the desired subprogram by pressing the corresponding DSP program selector key once or more. The name of the selected program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen. Program name ● TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 2 A ● CD TV/DBS VCR 1 DSP SPEAKERS 4 DVD/LD TAPE/MD DSP SPEAKERS MOVIE THEATER 1 DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 A Subprogram name Program name Adjust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 50 and 51.) You can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 60 to 64.) Notes ● Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at this time. So, when you select the same input source the next time, the same program will be automatically recalled. ● If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround sound effect. ● When a monaural sound source is played with the program PRO LOGIC (Normal/Enhanced), a proper effect will not be obtained. Moreover, sound may become unnatural depending on the settings of the speaker output modes (1. CENTER SPEAKER to 4. LFE/BASS OUT) in the SET MENU mode. ● When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels may produce an unnatural effect. ● When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used and the EFFECT button also will not function. 48 BASIC OPERATION English m To enjoy a video source encoded with Dolby Pro Logic Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS Note If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS decoded to another disc not encoded with DTS when the red “dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly selected disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts” indicator flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-decoding mode. To play back the disc normally, change the current DTSdecoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector key on the remote controller or the INPUT MODE button on the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns off. When you select the program No. 8, 9 or 10, and the input signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital is automatically decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with DTS, DTS is automatically decoded. The following indicators on the display panel show you what sound processing is being made. 1 2 3 DIGITAL 4 5 PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with DTS is played m To cancel the effect sound The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFFECT ON/OFF key on the remote controller make it simple to compare the normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound. To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound, press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time to restore the effect sound. back and DTS is decoded. Front panel 2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with DTS is played back and DTS is decoded. EFFECT 3 Lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is not in 2-channels. 4 Lights up when Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being decoded. 5 Lights up when Digital Sound Field Processor is turned on. The display panel or the monitor screen will show the selected subprogram according to the type of the decoding. Notes Dolby Digital will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded with Dolby Digital. DTS will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded with DTS. ● ● ● Remote control EFFECT or ON/OFF Notes If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, signals of all channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers. ● ● If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is pressed to turn effect sounds off when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, press the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key to turn effect sounds ON, or use input signals not encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. If the input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them is similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals. <For China, Singapore and General models only> The indicator 3 will also light up when the input mode is set to “D.D.RF” even if no signal encoded with Dolby Digital is input to this unit. 49 BASIC OPERATION Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and subwoofer You can adjust the sound output level of the each speaker even if the output level is already set in “Speaker balance adjustment” on pages 32 to 34. CENTER (Center speaker output level) R SUR. (Right rear speaker output level) L SUR. (Left rear speaker output level) SWFR (Subwoofer output level) Speakers Control range (dB) Preset value CENTER RIGHT SURROUND (R SUR.) LEFT SURROUND (L SUR.) SUBWOOFER (SWFR) MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to 0 0 0 0 0 Notes ● Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the same in all the digital sound field programs. ● 50 The value of each speaker output level you set the last time will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected for more than one week, these values will be automatically changed to the factory default settings. ● If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, the center speaker output level cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● When one of the DSP programs No. 1 to 5 is selected, the center speaker output level cannot be adjusted. BASIC OPERATION English m Method of adjustment NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 1 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT l2 28 8 60 2 4 40 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 2 2 3 4 5 5 BALANCE 0 l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 4 L5 5 R 6 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 EXT. DEC. TEST EFFECT LEVEL ON/OFF TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB DOWN TUNING UP PARAMETER 1, 2 INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO DVD/LD 3 4 TV SPORTS 5 0 EXT. DECODER REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 DISCO 4 MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT 0 PHONES ROCK CONCERT TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD SET MENU TUNER PHONO PROGRAM SLEEP ON SCREEN TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R Set to “PARAMETER.” 1 2 SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switich to the PARAMETER position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 1 Select the speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust by using one of the following methods. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller: LEVEL LEVEL SET MENU Press once or more. LEVEL Press once. Press once or more. Press once or more. Press a button repeatedly until the name of the desired speaker(s) appears on the display. 2 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s). LEVEL 3 SET MENU Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make adjustments on the other speaker(s). 51 BASIC OPERATION Brief overview of digital sound field programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment. Note The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are listening in. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments. m Program No. 1 to 5: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources) ● ● ● DSP When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) Speaker output: main, rear When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( Speaker output: main, center, rear DSP When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) Speaker output: main, center, rear PROGRAM No. 52 DIGITAL DSP ) FEATURE 1 CONCERT HALL In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the main speakers, creating an expansive large hall ambience. Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field. 2 CHURCH This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high pointed dome and columns along the sides. This interior produces very long reverberations. 3 JAZZ CLUB This is a small, cozy jazz club with a low ceiling. The sound is very close and intimate. 4 ROCK CONCERT This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will experience a very dynamic or lively sound field. 5 DISCO This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. BASIC OPERATION ● These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder. ● Speaker output: main, center, rear Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from the center speaker(s). ● For program No. 6 and 7 only, indicators light up as follows. When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) DSP When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) DSP PROGRAM No. DIGITAL DSP English m Program No. 6 to 10: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video sources) ) FEATURE 6 TV SPORTS This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This program is the most suitable for sports programs. 7 MONO MOVIE This program is designed specifically to enhance mono source programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound image created in this mode is wider and slightly forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall sound. It is particularly effective when used with old mono movies, news broadcasts and dialog. 53 BASIC OPERATION ● Program No. 8 to 9 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 8 PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) 70 mm Spectacle DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. FEATURE Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, giving both the video and the sound field incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions) are ideal for use with this program. DGTL Spectacle DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Spectacle DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 70 mm Sci-Fi DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL Sci-Fi DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound design of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DTS Sci-Fi DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 9 MOVIE THEATER 2 70 mm Adventure DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL Adventure DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Adventure DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 70 mm General DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL General DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS General DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 54 Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. The data of the sound field of an opera house are used for the front presence side, so the three dimensional feeling of the sound field is emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert hall on the rear surround side, powerful reverberations are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure movies, etc. with much presence. This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The front presence side of the sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. BASIC OPERATION Program No. 10 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 10 PROGRAM /DTS SURROUND SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) FEATURE PRO LOGIC/Normal ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS. The realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. PRO LOGIC DIGITAL ) DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ( Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. English ● DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. PRO LOGIC/Enhanced DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. Ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the newest film theater. The digital sound field processing and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS decoding are precisely performed without altering the originally designed sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field fold the viewer naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward the screen. DTS DIGITAL SUR./Enhanced DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 55 ADVANCED FEATURES “SET MENU” mode The following 13 functions maximize the performance of your system and increase the enjoyment of audio listening and video watching. 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL 6. DOLBY DGTL SET LFE LEVEL 7. DOLBY DGTL SET DYNAMIC RANGE 8. DTS SET LFE LEVEL 19. CENTER DELAY 10. PARAMETER INI 11. MEMORY GUARD 12. TV/DBS INPUT 13. DIMMER m Changes and adjustments Set to “SET MENU” 1 PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX NATURAL SOUND HALL CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 4 L5 5 R VCR 1 SOURCE 6 / DTS SURROUND –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE PHONO EXT. DEC. 8 +10 9 1 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 AUTO/MAN’L MONO DVD/LD 3 4 TUNING MODE FM/AM REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TV SPORTS 5 7 2 0 A/B/C/D/E 2 DISCO 4 EXT. DECODER 60 PHONES 1 ROCK CONCERT MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CHURCH JAZZ CLUB LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX LEVEL EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PARAMETER PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 2 2 ● Refer to the information in the display panel or monitor screen during operation. The monitor power must be turned on to display information on the monitor. ● When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 1 To make changes, select the applicable function by using one of the following methods. When operating on the front panel: LEVEL When operating on the Remote controller: SET MENU Press once or more. 2 Select the desired position or edit parameter for the function by using the following keys. LEVEL 3 56 Press once or more. SET MENU Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change a setting or adjust for another function. ADVANCED FEATURES English m Function description 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL (Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system) Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change, unless your speaker system is modified.) 6. DOLBY DGTL SET LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel] ● Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital contain LFE signals. Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.) 7. DOLBY DGTL SET DYNAMIC RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range) ● Choices: MAX/STD/MIN Preset position: MAX ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is decoded. “Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide dynamic range. Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound track into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged. Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in a level suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts of source sound cannot be heard well because they will be lost among noises in your environment. Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format by “compressing” the data of sound. MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds like a movie theater. Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can listen to a source in a high output level in a room specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment. STD (Standard): In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the source suitable for low level listening. MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than in the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective when you must listen to a source in an extremely low level. * In this position, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, select the MAX or STD position. 57 ADVANCED FEATURES 8. DTS SET LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel] ● Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS contain LFE signals. Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.) 9. CENTER DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)] ● Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step) Preset value: 0 ms ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center channel signals. Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel). The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated. In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to your listening position may be shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that case, sounds from the left main, center and right main speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by delaying the sound from the center speaker. 10. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program) You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program. Note that some DSP programs have two subprograms; all parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this operation. Initializing method Use the remote controller for the operation. A program number whose parameters has been changed is marked with “ ”. Press a DSP program selector key which corresponds to the program number whose parameters you want to initialize. When initialized, the “ ” mark will disappear. * * 58 ADVANCED FEATURES If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters and other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position, they are locked and cannot be changed. The following functions on this unit can be locked by this operation. • • • • • English 11. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments) DSP parameters Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode ON SCREEN display key LEVEL key TEST key 12. TV/DBS INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode of the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals) For the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this unit, you can designate the input mode that is automatically selected when the power of this unit is switched on. AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always selected when the power of this unit is switched on. LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the last time is memorized and will not be changed even if the power of this unit is switched off. * Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode. 13. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel) You can adjust the brightness of the display panel in five degree increments. 59 ADVANCED FEATURES Creating your own sound fields What is a sound field? In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we need to first understand what a sound field really is. What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains. The elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: (1) Early Reflections. Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 62 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. (2) Reverberations. These are caused by reflections from more than one surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the DSP. 60 DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing values of parameters, however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Even if the power cord of this unit is disconnected from the AC outlet, your custom sound fields will remain in the DSP’s memory for about two weeks. The following page details how to make your own sound fields. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. For the programs which have subprograms, each subprogram has a set of parameters. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the “early reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced reflections you hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. Refer to “Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters” on pages 62 to 64 for a description of what each parameter does, how it effects the sound, and its control range. ADVANCED FEATURES English m Selecting and editing program parameters This adjustment can be made only by using the remote controller and watching the monitor screen or the display panel. Note Information on the monitor screen would be easier to see than the display panel. V AUX HALL 3, 4 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 TEST ON/OFF 0 1 2 1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the PARAMETER position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. LEVEL PARAMETER 4 If necessary, select the desired subprogram. HALL PARAMETER CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 SET MENU 2 4, 5, 6 SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 or 9 TEST 0 Turn your monitor on. If the currently selected type of display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN display key and select the full display. Press the button for the currently selected program once or more. ON SCREEN 5 3 Select the parameter which you want to edit. If no DSP program is selected, select a desired program. HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 6 9 TEST Change the value on the selected parameter to create the effect you want. 0 The selected program name and its parameters will be displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped cursor points to the first parameter or subprogram name. Subprogram “+” increases the value of the selected parameter, and “–” decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both cases you can hold the key down to quickly move to the desired value. The display will pause for a moment at the initial set value of the parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen, the mark at the head of the parameter name will disappear upon reaching the initial set value of the parameter.) * Notes ● For details about parameters, refer to pages 62 to 64. ● Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even if power is lost due to a power failure or the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet for about two weeks, after which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values or conditions. 61 ADVANCED FEATURES m Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ● ROOM SIZE P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger the value, the larger the simulated room will sound. Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound source. What it Does: Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before the subsequent, dense reverberation begins. S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 Standard setting is 1.0. Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all doubled). Level Level Direct sound Level Direct sound Direct sound Early reflections Early reflections Early reflections Large Small Time Time Time Small space Large space ● INIT. DELAY (Initial Delay) P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound. Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective surface determines the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the sound source within the acoustic environment. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds What it Does: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an echo effect. Level Level Control Range: 1 – 49 milliseconds Direct sound Early reflections Small INIT. DLY 62 Time Level Large INIT. DLY Time INIT. DLY Time ADVANCED FEATURES LIVENESS (Presence Liveness) How it Affects the Sound: This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls in the hall. English ● LIVENESS Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front presence sound field becomes. The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity (decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear surround sound field becomes. What it Does: Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control Range: 0 – 10. Level Level Small Large Time Dead Level Direct sound Time Live Time ● REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) How it Affects the Sound: Control Range: The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. 1.0 – 5.0 seconds. The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2 and 3. What it Does: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz). Level Level 60 dB Direct sound Level Early reflections Small 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations Large 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations REV. TIME Time Reverberations 63 ADVANCED FEATURES ● REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Direct sound REV. LEVEL Time ● S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the later the surround sound field is generated. Control Range: When Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded: 15 – 30 milliseconds When Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded: 0 – 15 milliseconds When a program without Dolby Surround or DTS encoded is used: 15 – 49 milliseconds 64 ADVANCED FEATURES English Setting the SLEEP timer Use the built-in SLEEP timer to automatically turn this unit into the standby mode after the time you set elapses. The SLEEP timer is useful when you plan to fall asleep while this unit is playing back or recording a source. The SLEEP timer also automatically turns off external units connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear of this unit. The SLEEP timer can only be set using the remote controller. To set the SLEEP time 1 To cancel the SLEEP timer Select the source using the INPUT SELECTOR and start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source unit. Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. (After a while, the display returns to the original indication.) A 2 B Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until the desired SLEEP time appears on the display. * “SLEEP time” is the time that elapses before this unit is automatically turned into the standby mode. C SLEEP REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER A B SLEEP C Note The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote controller) or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Indicates the SLEEP time. SPEAKERS DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 A SLEEP Flashes. Each time you press the SLEEP key, the SLEEP time changes as follows. (Minutes) 120 90 60 30 SLEEP OFF (The SLEEP timer is off.) After a while, the display returns to the original indication. 65 REMOTE CONTROLLER The remote controller can operate the main unit as well as other Yamaha audio and video components. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of functions in sequence onto a single key, or you can use one of the preset macros to operate other Yamaha components in your home theater. This remote controller also has a sophisticated Learn feature that allows it to acquire functions from other remote controllers you use with other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with infrared remote control receivers. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote controllers in your listening room. Basic operation (Cover is open) The remote controller is designed to control the most commonly used functions. If the CD player, tape deck, LD player, etc. is a YAMAHA component with remote control compatibility, this remote controller will also control various functions. * For basic operations, the cover must be opened. m Key name and function J TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE G A/B TAPE/MD A CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD I TV/DBS 2 VCR 2 C V-AUX HALL 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST G PHONO EFFECT ON/OFF F E 0 LEVEL PARAMETER D MACRO SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON OFF 5 6 7 8 9 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB MASTER VOLUME QUICK 4 H A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 0 C SLOW 3 PRESET B A REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER View with the cover opened. 66 Side view REMOTE CONTROLLER 0 SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys Press the SYSTEM POWER ON key to turn on the power. Press the STANDBY key to set this unit in the standby mode. English 1 TAPE/MD keys These keys control tape decks or MD recorders. The A/B/C switch (I) should be set to the “A” position to control tape decks, and “C” position for MD recorders. * The DIR A, B and A/B keys apply only to double cassette tape decks. * Pressing the DIR A key will reverse the tape direction on a single cassette tape deck with the automatic reverse function. * The and keys work as follows. For tape decks: : Rewinds a tape. : Advances a tape fast. A RESET button This button is inside the battery compartment. Press this button to reset the internal microcomputer for controling remote control operations. This button is used when the remote controller “freezes”. * Learned functions will not be erased when this button is pressed. RESET button For MD recorders: : Locates the beginning of the current or previous track. : Locates the beginning of the next track. 2 CD/DVD/LD player keys These keys control compact disc players, DVD players or LD players. Set the A/B/C switch (I) to the “A” position to control compact disc players, “B” position for DVD players and “C” position for LD players. * The DISC key is used for disc changers only. * The STOP key is used for DVD players and LD players only. B MASTER VOLUME 3 Tuner keys Control tuners. The A/B/C switch (I) should be set to the “A” position. +: Press this key to select the next preset station number. –: Press this key to select the previous preset station number. A/B/C/D/E: Selects the group (A – E) of preset station numbers. D / and –/+ keys The (up) and (down) keys change the parameters or functions according to the mode selected by the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch. The – and + keys adjust or make changes in the parameter or function. 4 DSP program selector keys Press a key to select a DSP program when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. Includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder, and DTS decoder. 5 TEST key This key is used when adjusting the speaker balance. (Refer to pages 32 to 34.) 6 LEVEL key This key is used to adjust the output level of the center and rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this key (several times) to select the speaker(s). The name will be illuminated on the display. Then press the + or – keys (D) to change the output level. 7 PARAMETER/SET MENU switch Set this switch to “PARAMETER” to edit a DSP program parameter. Set to “SET MENU” to adjust or make changes in a function in the SET MENU mode. 8 SLEEP timer key Press this key to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off, and set the SLEEP time. (Refer to page 65.) 9 ON SCREEN display key Press this key to change the type of display on the monitor screen. Three types of displays are available. Each time the key is pressed, the information can be changed to a full, simple and no display. (up) and (down) keys Press these keys to increase or decrease the volume. C MUTE key Press this key to mute the volume. The volume can be returned to the original level by pressing any remote controller key which controls this unit. The indicator on the VOLUME control flashes during the mute mode. E EFFECT ON/OFF key Press this key to turn on/off the digital sound field processor, which includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. F EXT. DEC. key Press this key to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function takes priority over the input selector key setting. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel. The source selected with the input selector keys becomes the current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated on the display panel. G Input selector keys Press a key to select the input source. H A/B/C indicators One of these indicators will turn to red depending on the position of the A/B/C switch. I A/B/C switch Normally this switch is set to the “A” position. Use the “B” position to control a Yamaha DVD player with the CD/DVD/LD player keys (2). Use the “C” position to control a Yamaha LD player with the CD/DVD/LD player keys (2), or control a Yamaha MD recorder with the TAPE/MD keys (1). J TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator This indicator will be illuminated when a key is pressed on the remote controller. (Transmitting infrared signals.) Note The functions of the keys to control other Yamaha components are the same as the corresponding keys on those components. Refer to those components’ instruction manuals for details. 67 REMOTE CONTROLLER Using the “learning-capable” keys (Cover is open) This is a learning remote controller. The shaded keys in the illustration shown below can be programmed to “learn” control functions from other remote controllers. This unit can be used in place of other remote controllers by learning their functions. It will be much convenient for you to operate various audio and video components. Some of the “learning-capable” keys are originally empty and others have already been preset with functions to control this unit and other Yamaha components. You can store new functions to them (in place of preset functions) as desired. * See page 74 for the learning method. * See page 76 for clearing a learned function (or all learned functions). Note If the memory capacity of the remote controller becomes full, no further learning is possible even if some learning-capable keys are not occupied with new functions. If, for example, you store Yamaha codes only into this remote controller, up to about 20 functions can be stored. Therefore, we recommend that only required functions be stored. Keys which can have three functions (1, 2, 3, 4) (*1) In the “Learning-capable” keys, the keys numbered 1–4 in the illustration on the left can have three functions. This is because they have three memory areas (A, B and C). (One function per area.) You can store new functions into the area B and C, and use three functions on a key by switching the memory areas with the A/B/C switch. (Area A cannot learn a new function.) TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A CD 1 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS 2 To use these keys: 1. Before using a key, select area A, B or C of the key on which the function you want to use is stored by using the A/B/C switch. 2. Press the key. The default settings of these keys are as follows. VCR 2 C 3 A/B/C switch TUNER PRESET The position of A/B/C switch 2 A/B/C/D/E TAPE/MD V-AUX HALL 4 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 7 8 +10 9 TEST EXT. DEC. CD DVD/LD TUNER TV/DBS ON/OFF Empty 1 Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha MD recorder. (A/B, DIR A and B are empty.) 2 Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha CD player. (STOP is empty.) Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha DVD player (except the models DVD-1000 and DVD-S700). Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha LD player. (DISC is empty.) Preset with functions for controlling the built-in tuner. Preset as the DSP program selector keys (1–9, 0) and the TEST key. (+10 is empty.) Empty Empty Preset as the DSP program selector keys (1–9, 0) and the TEST key. (+10 is empty.) Preset as the DSP program selector keys (1–9, 0) and the TEST key. (+10 is empty.) PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 1 MUTE VCR STANDBY 3 REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER 4 Cover is open. (*1): These buttons are used for learning a new function or clearing a learned function (or all learned functions). For details, refer to pages 74 to 76 . 68 V-AUX Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha tape deck. EFFECT 0 LEVEL C B PHONO MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 / DTS SURROUND VCR 2 VCR 1 A REMOTE CONTROLLER Empty keys (1, 2) These are empty keys. Each key can learn a function from another remote controller. For example, the TV key is useful for storing the function of your TV’s power switch, and the VCR key can be used for your VCR’s power switch. To record new functions It is recommended that you write down stored key functions on the provided user function stickers and paste them on the reverse side of the remote controller or the reverse side of the remote controller’s cover. About the marks on the remote controller Mark Meaning English Notes • Area A cannot learn a new function. To store a new function, store it onto area B or C. • If a key which has a preset function learns a new function, the preset function will not work but is not deleted. When the learned function is cleared, the preset function is restored. (For information on clearing a learned function, refer to page 76.) Tape (Tape deck, VCR, etc.) Disc (CD player, LD player, etc.) Radio wave (Tuner, TV/BS tuner, etc.) An input selector key and other control keys which have the same mark will work for the same input source. These marks are also helpful for storing new functions. Examples) • Area B of keys 1 is suitable for storing functions to control your VCR. • Area B of keys 3 is suitable for storing functions to control your TV/BS tuner. Memory back-up All of the learned functions will be retained while you replace the batteries. However, if no batteries are installed for a few hours, the learned functions will be erased and will have to be learned again. A B C REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER 69 REMOTE CONTROLLER Using OPERATION CONTROL keys (Cover is closed) When the cover of the remote controller is closed, you can easily operate Yamaha components including learned functions by using the OPERATION CONTROL keys. TRANSMIT /LEARN TRANSMIT CLEAR REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD CD TUNER VCR 1 DVD/LD TV/DBS Input selector keys TAPE/MD A CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS 2 VCR 2 VCR 2 C (*1) 3 V-AUX PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX HALL EXT. DEC. EFFECT OPERATION CONTROL SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV OPERATION CONTROL keys PHONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV THEATER 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MOVIE MONO MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 (+10 ) LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE MUTE VCR VCR STANDBY STANDBY REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Cover is closed. When the cover is closed, the OPERATION CONTROL keys substitute for the keys numbered 1, 2 or 3 and the (+10) keys on the above illustration. To use these keys, you do not have to switch the A/B/C switch. The functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys are determined by the input selector key pressed before using the OPERATION CONTROL keys. Note Whether the cover is opened or closed, the EFFECT, MASTER VOLUME, MUTE, TV and VCR keys will not change their functions. * If the MACRO switch on the side of the remote controller is set to “OFF”, the SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys will not also change their functions whether the cover is opened or closed. (*1): This key is originally empty. If this key has a learned function, pressing this key executes the learned function. 70 REMOTE CONTROLLER To operate a Yamaha CD player 1. Press the “CD” input selector key. 2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the functions in area A of keys 2.) OPERATION CONTROL Skip to previous track To operate your VCR 1. Press the “VCR” input selector key. 2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the functions in area B of keys 1. This area is originally preset with no function. You must store the functions related to controlling the VCR in area B of keys 1 beforehand.) Play OPERATION CONTROL Skip to next track English Examples of operations controlled by using the OPERATION CONTROL keys Play Rewind Fast forward Pause or Stop Pause or Stop See the table below for a combination of an input selector key and key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out. (Also, refer to the table on page 68.) Selected input selector key TAPE/MD CD Key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out Functions in area A of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) Functions in area A of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, and ) TUNER Functions in area A of keys 3 and VCR 1 Functions in area B of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) (+10) DVD/LD Functions in area B of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, TV/DBS Functions in area B of keys 3 and VCR 2 ) (+10) Functions in area C of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) Functions in area C of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, V-AUX and Functions in area C of keys 3 and and ) (+10) Pressing the “PHONO” or “EXT. DEC.” input selector key has no effect on the OPERATION CONTROL keys. Notes • If an OPERATION CONTROL key is substituted for a key which has no function (empty), then a command will not be carried out. Depending on your plan, store functions from other remote controllers into an empty area of those keys. (Refer to page 74 for the learning method.) • While playing an audio/video unit, if you want to operate another unit by using the remote controller (for example, if you want to rewind a videotape while listening to a CD), you should open the cover of the remote controller and use the A/B/C switch and the corresponding keys. (If you press an input selector key with the cover closed to change the functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys to the functions for controlling a VCR, the input of currently playing CD source is canceled.) 71 REMOTE CONTROLLER Macro operations (Cover is closed) The Macro feature makes it possible to operate a series of functions by pressing just one key. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the equipment, select the CD input, and press the play key to start playback. Using the Macro feature you can operate all those functions by simply pressing the CD macro key. The preset macro keys (the input selector keys and SYSTEM POWER ON/STANDBY keys with an orange mark next to them) are preset with macro programs. If you prefer, however, you can change the contents of a macro key by storing a desired series of functions on it. You can store up to seven functions onto a macro key. (Refer to page 75 for making a new macro.) Macros can be used only when the cover is closed and the MACRO switch is set to “SLOW” or “QUICK”. (If “OFF” is selected, no macro will function even if the cover is closed.) Setting the MACRO switch OFF: In this position, no macro will function even if the cover of the remote controller is closed. QUICK: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each command is transmitted at 0.5 second intervals. SLOW: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each command is transmitted at 3 second intervals. Preset macro keys TRANSMIT /LEARN TRANSMIT CLEAR REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD TAPE/MD A 1 CD CD TUNER TUNER VCR 1 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD DVD/LD 2 TV/DBS TV/DBS VCR 2 VCR 2 C PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX V-AUX HALL PHONO EXT. DEC. CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV THEATER 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MOVIE MONO MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 EFFECT OPERATION CONTROL 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 SLOW MUTE MACRO switch MACRO OFF MASTER VOLUME QUICK SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON 72 MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE STANDBY REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Cover is closed. (Set the MACRO switch to “QUICK” or “SLOW”.) ON/OFF PARAMETER VCR VCR EFFECT 0 LEVEL TV 9 TEST REMOTE CONTROLLER English The Macro feature allows you to operate several remote control functions in a programmed order by pressing one macro key. (Also, refer to the table on page 68.) Function of the key (and area) carried out when a macro key is pressed Macro key 2nd (Selects an input source.) 1st (Turns on this unit.) 3rd (Starts playback of a source.) TAPE/MD TAPE/MD “ ” on area A of keys 1 CD CD “ ” on area A of keys 2 TUNER TUNER VCR 1 VCR 1 “ ” on area B of keys 1 DVD/LD “ ” on area B of keys 2 DVD/LD SYSTEM POWER ON TV/DBS TV/DBS VCR 2 VCR 2 – – “ ” on area C of keys 1 “ ” on area C of keys 2 V-AUX V-AUX – PHONO PHONO – EXT. DEC. EXT. DEC. – Function of the key carried out when a macro key is pressed Macro key 1st SYSTEM POWER ON Turns on this unit. SYSTEM POWER ON 2nd Carries out the function of the TV key. 3rd Carries out the function of the VCR key. TV VCR Sets this unit to the standby mode. – – STANDBY STANDBY Notes • A key in which no function is stored will carry out no command. • If it occurs that this unit will not receive the second command because the internal operation of the first command takes a long time, set the MACRO switch to the “SLOW” position. • Once you press a macro key, this unit will not receive the command of another key (even if it is pressed) until this unit finishes carrying out all commands of the macro key. Take notice of this especially when the MACRO switch is in the “SLOW” position. • • Once you press a macro key, you must keep the remote controller directed at the main unit’s remote control sensor until the remote controller finishes transmitting all command signals of the macro key. You can also use the OPERATION CONTROL keys while using the macro functions. 73 REMOTE CONTROLLER Methods of learning and clearing functions m Learning a new function 1 Place this remote controller and the other remote controller so that they face each other. 5 Press and hold the key (on the other remote controller) which has the function you want to store. This remote controller TV RTS O 1 ST 2 2 ST K OC AD IU M 5 3 N O V U -A O H X P ST TE T C FE F EF / O F ON H RC U CH 9 CO IS 6 D O H X 0 1 B U CL ZZ JA 8 U -A P T ES V H RC U CH 9 CO IS 6 D UB 3 CL TV RTS O 4 M 5 IU SP AD 1 Other remote controller LEARN MACRO (Press by using a ball-point pen or similar object.) Flashes slowly. When learning is finished, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator stops lighting. You can release the key. Then the indicator begins flashing slowly. * If a signal is not successfully received, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode prior to step 4 is restored. Restart from step 4. * If memory capacity is full, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly to show you that learning is impossible, and then the mode before you began learning operations is restored. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the LEARN button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. 6 3 7 If necessary, select the memory area by using the A/B/C switch on the side panel of the remote controller. O TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR T C FE F EF / O F ON 2 N About 5–10 cm (2–4 in.) Repeat steps 3–5 to store more functions. When you finish the learning operation, press the LEARN button. CLEAR 4 Press the key on this remote controller in which you will store a new function. Lights up. O N O H P 3 T C CO FE F IS D EF /OF 2 6 ON H M IU RC AD U ST CH 9 1 5 UB TV RTS ST CL O TE ZZ JA 8 4 0 CK RO +1 7 SP X U -A V E * If a key which cannot learn another function is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after a key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. Restart from step 2. 74 LEARN MACRO Notes ● Newly learned functions will replace previously learned functions. ● If there is no more room in the memory area for a function to be learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator will flash rapidly. In this case, even if some keys are not occupied with functions from other remote controllers, no further learning is possible. ● If you close the cover while learning, and then about 5 seconds pass, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before beginning learning operations is restored. Restart from step 2. However, if you open the cover within 5 seconds, the mode before closing the cover is restored. ● There may occasionally be instances in which, due to the signal-coding and modulation employed by the other remote controller, this remote controller will not be able to “learn” its signals. ● When you press the LEARN, MACRO or CLEAR button, or the RESET button inside of the battery compartment by using a sharp-pointed thing, be careful not to damage the button. If you will use a mechanical pencil, make sure that the lead is retracted. REMOTE CONTROLLER English m Making a new macro A new macro can be programmed onto any preset macro key in place of the factory preset functions. (See page 72 to know what keys are preset macro keys.) You can make as many as 13 new macro keys. A macro key can learn as many as seven functions of other keys. Note If you store a continuous function such as lowering the volume level, it may not work well when carried out as a part of macro. 1 4 TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO Flashes slowly. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the MACRO button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you pressed the MACRO button is restored. Press the MACRO button again. 2 Press a preset macro key on which you want to make a new macro. CD TRANSMIT /LEARN Lights up. * If a key other than a preset macro key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. 3 Press a key whose function you want to store as the first function of the new macro. SYSTEM POWER ON Repeat step 3 to store the second, the third and more functions. You can store up to seven key functions in series as a macro. * If the seventh key function has been learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. (This shows that the key has completed learning a series of functions as a macro.) You do not have to follow the next step. 5 When you finish learning, press the MACRO button. CLEAR LEARN MACRO Notes • If, for example, you store a function whose operation takes a long time as the first command, add a command which has no function between the first command and the second command, or repeat the second command again. • If you program the power on/off switching function of TV, VCR, etc. as a part of a macro sequence, note that it switches the current mode to the other (“on” to “off”, or “off” to “on”). For example, when you press the macro key, if the power of TV, VCR, etc. is already on, the power will be turned off even though you may not want it to do so. TRANSMIT /LEARN Goes off. (When learning is finished, this indicator lights up again.) * If a key whose function cannot be stored as a command of macro is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. * If about 30 seconds pass before a key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. Restart from step 1. 75 REMOTE CONTROLLER m Clearing learned functions To Clear a Learned Function 1 To Clear All Learned Functions To clear a learned key function, press the LEARN button using a ball-point pen or similar object. To clear a macro you made, press the MACRO button. 1 Select the kind of key functions all of which you want to clear by using the MACRO switch on the side panel of the remote controller. or SLOW QUICK OFF MACRO TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF: Flashes slowly. 2 Press and hold the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen or similar object. Select this position if you want to clear all of the learned functions except macros. QUICK: Select this position if you want to clear all of the macros you made. SLOW: Select this position if you want to clear all of the learned functions including macros. 2 CLEAR LEARN MACRO Press the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen or similar object. TRANSMIT /LEARN 3 CLEAR Holding the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the key whose function you want to clear until the indicator flashes 3 times. CD TRANSMIT /LEARN Flashes. To clear two or more functions sequentially, do not release the CLEAR button, and repeat this step. Note If you clear a learned function of a key, the key is restored by the originally preset function. (except the keys which are originally preset with no function.) LEARN MACRO Flashes slowly. * If one of the following is made after you press the CLEAR button, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Press the CLEAR button again. • MACRO switch is switched to another position. • Another key is pressed. • There is no operation for about 30 seconds. 3 Press and hold the CLEAR button again. While holding down the CLEAR button, press and hold the MASTER VOLUME and keys simultaneously until the indicator flashes 7 times. TRANSMIT /LEARN MUTE Flashes. 76 You can make up a dual-room audio/video system with this unit. In this system, you can make this unit send audio and video signals to the main room’s equipment (speakers and TV monitor) and the second room’s equipment (amplifier and TV monitor) respectively. For example, you can enjoy listening to a CD source in the main room while another person is enjoying watching an LD source in the second room. English CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE m Connections Connect the ZONE 2 OUT audio output terminals of this unit to the MAIN IN terminals (or equivalents) of the amplifier in the second room, and connect the ZONE 2 OUT video output terminal of this unit to the video signal input terminal of the TV monitor in the second room. The following optional products are required to use the dualroom function. 1 An infrared emitter in the main room This emitter emits the infrared signals transmitted by the remote controller in the second room to the other components in the main room (for example, CD player or LD player). 2 An amplifier, TV monitor and speakers for the second room 3 A remote controller used in the second room 4 An infrared signal receiver for the second room LD player etc. This unit AUDIO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT Main Room VIDEO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT Example of system configuration and connections Second Room 2 Amplifier TV monitor (*1) 1 Infrared emitter (*1): Some Yamaha models can be connected to this unit’s REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminals. If you connect these units in series, the use of an infrared emitter may not be necessary. OUT IN OUT IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL IN REMOTE CONTROL OUT 3 Remote controller 4 Infrared signal receiver Note Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a dual-room system, we recommend that you consult with a custom installation specialist for connections which will best meet your requirements. This unit Up to 6 units can be connected in this connecting way. 77 CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE m Listening to (and watch) a source in the second room 1 Set the VOLUME control of the amplifier in the second room to “minimum”. 2 Select the source you will listen to and/or watch in the second room with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector on the front panel of this unit in the main room. 3 Play back the source. 4 Increase the volume on the amplifier in the second room. 78 Notes If you want to listen to (and watch) the same source as that selected for the main room, set the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector to the “SOURCE” position. • Signals of the source selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector are also sent to the tape deck, VCR, etc. connected to this unit as signals to be recorded. • Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. English TROUBLESHOOTING General Problem Cause What to Do The unit fails to turn on when the STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns into the standby mode suddenly soon after the power is turned on. Power cord is not plugged in or is not completely inserted. Firmly plug in the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not set to either end. Set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. This unit does not work normally. There is an influence of strong external noise (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while using this unit. Turn this unit into the standby mode and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed, connect the power and operate this unit again. No sound or no picture. Incorrect output cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. Appropriate input source is not selected. Select the appropriate input source with the INPUT SELECTOR or the EXT. DECODER button. Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. Digital signals other than PCM audio and Dolby Digital (or DTS) encoded signals which this unit cannot reproduce are input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. No picture There is no S video terminal connection between this unit and the TV, though S video signals are input to this unit. Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of short circuit etc. Turn this unit into the standby mode, and then turn on to reset the protection circuit. The SLEEP timer came on. Cancel the SLEEP timer function. Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control. Adjust it to the appropriate position. Incorrect cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. The EFFECT button is set off. Press the EFFECT button to turn it on. A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS). Use a different sound field program. The function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “NONE” position. Select the appropriate position. One of the DSP programs No. 1 to No. 5 is selected when the input signal of source is 2-channel stereo (analog/PCM). Select another program. The input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS do not have center channel signals. Refer to the instructions for the source currently played. The function “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU mode is set in the SW or BOTH position, though your system does not include a subwoofer. Select the MAIN position. Output mode selection for each channel (MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper. Make output mode selections suitable for your speaker system. Incorrect cord connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Make the GND connection between the turntable and this unit. The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The player should be connected to the unit through the MC head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or sound is distorted. The component connected to the TAPE/MD OUT terminals of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. Only one side speaker outputs the sound. No sound from the effect speakers. No sound from the center speaker. Poor bass reproduction. Sound “hums”. 79 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause What to Do DSP parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. The function “11. MEMORY GUARD” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position. Set to the “OFF” position. “INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display and no sound is heard. A nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is misoperating. Check the source, or turn off the unit playing back the source and then turn on again. The sound field cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound field on a tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE/MD OUT terminals. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or power supply with low voltage. Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC outlet, and then plug in again after about one minute. A source cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. The source unit is connected to this unit between digital terminals only. Make additional connection between analog terminals. Noise from nearby TV or tuner. This unit is too close to the affected equipment. Move the unit further away from the affected equipment. The sound is degraded when listening with the headphones connected to the compact disc player or tape deck that is connected with this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn the power to this unit on. Remote controller Problem The remote controller does not work. The remote controller does not function properly. Learning cannot be made successfully. (The TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator does not light up or flash.) Continuous functions such as volume are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. 80 Cause What to Do The batteries of this remote controller are weak. Replace the batteries with new ones and press the RESET button on the remote controller. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote controller. Wrong distance or angle. The remote controller will function from a maximum range of 6 meters, no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the main unit. Change position of the main unit. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote controller. The batteries of this remote controller and/or the other remote controller are weak. Replace the batteries (and press the RESET button for this remote controller). The distance between the two remote controllers is too far or short. Place the remote controllers at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote controller is not compatible with this remote controller. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary commands. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote controller. Learning process incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function key on the other remote controller until the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator begins flashing slowly. TROUBLESHOOTING FM Problem Cause What to Do FM stereo reception is noisy. Because of the characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts, this is limited to cases where the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high quality directional FM antenna. Set the TUNING MODE button to the manual tuning mode. There is distortion and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust antenna placement to eliminate multipath interference. A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been unplugged for a long period. Repeat the presetting procedure. A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. Weak signal or loose antenna connections. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and rotate it for best reception. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat but it is difficult to eliminate all the noises. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A television set is being used nearby. Relocate this unit away from the TV. English Tuner AM Use the manual tuning method. <For China and General models only> Although you make the operation for recalling a preset station, the station cannot be tuned in, or a station other than the preset one is tuned in. Some memory of the preset stations was modified because the setting of the FREQUENCY STEP switch was changed after storing stations. Repeat storing stations by following the preset tuning procedure. When playing back a source encoded with DTS: Problem Cause What to Do The player which plays back the source is not connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit. The player must be connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit besides analog audio signal terminal connections. The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on this unit. Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn on the DTS decoder built into this unit. A percussive noise is heard when you begin playing back a source encoded with DTS. If the “AUTO” input mode is selected, depending on some sources, there may be a case that a noise is heard while this unit is identifying the format of input signal. Set the input mode of the currently selected input source to “DTS”. No sound is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS, even though the “AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is selected on this unit. The DTS decoder built into this unit does not function because the player has a digital volume control and it is set at a position other than “maximum”, “neutral” or “ineffective”. Set the player’s digital volume control at the maximum, neutral or ineffective position. No sound is heard when you play back an MD onto which you have recorded a source encoded with DTS. A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto an MD. No sound is heard when you play back a DAT onto which you have recorded a source encoded with DTS. Depending on a DAT deck, a source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto a DAT. No sound is heard when you play back a source (CD etc.) even though the currently selected input mode is “AUTO”. In the “AUTO” mode, DTS-decoding mode cannot be changed to the normal (PCM) digital signal input mode automatically. A loud hissing noise is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS. Press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector button (for the currently selected source) on the remote controller so that “PCM” appears on the display. Notes • It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back a source must be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a D-to-A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard. • If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode to prevent a noise from being output. • A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a source encoded with DTS cannot be played back. The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback). 81 SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms) ....................... 100W+100W CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms) ................................... 100W REAR L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms) .........................100W+100W Maximum Power [China and General models only] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R ................................135W+135W CENTER.............................................135W REAR L/R ...............................135W+135W Dynamic Power Per Channel (by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] MAIN L/R (8 ohms/6 ohms/4 ohms/2 ohms) (When both channels are driven) ...............................130W/160W/200W/240W Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] MAIN L/R (8 ohms) .......................... 1.13 dB DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel [Singapore model only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms) (When both channels are driven) ..... 150W IEC Power [Singapore model only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8 ohms) (When both channels are driven)........ 105W Power Band Width (20 Hz to 20 kHz) 8 ohms, 50W, 0.08% THD (When both channels are driven) ...........................................10 Hz to 50 kHz Damping Factor MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms) .............................................. More than 160 Input Sensitivity/Impedance (100W/8 ohms) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX ........ 150 mV/47 k-ohms PHONO MM ......................2.5 mV/47 k-ohms Maximum Input Signal (1 kHz, 0.05% THD) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON) ................................................. 2.3V or more PHONO MM ....................... 110 mV or more 82 Output Level/Impedance REC OUT ....................... 150 mV/1.0 k-ohms PRE OUT MAIN, CENTER, REAR .......................................... 2.6V/1.1 k-ohms SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL) (EFFECT OFF) ................ 4.0V/1.5 k-ohms ZONE 2 OUT ...................... 1.0V/1.5 k-ohms Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance Output Level CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input: 1 kHz, 150 mV, RL=8 ohms ........................... 0.5V Impedance .................................... 440 ohms Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT ....................................................... 0±0.5 dB Filter Characteristics MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R (MAIN, CENTER, REAR SP: SMALL) (H.P.F.) .......................fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct. SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.) .................................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct. Gain Tracking Error (0 to –60 dB) MAIN L/R ....................................3 dB or less Audio Muting ............................................ – ∞ VIDEO SECTION Video Signal Type [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................NTSC [Australia and Singapore models] .......... PAL [China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL Video Signal Level ................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms RIAA Equalization Deviation (20 Hz to 20 kHz) PHONO MM ..................................0±0.5 dB Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to SP OUT (MAIN L/R), 50W/8 ohms ......................................... Less than 0.025% PHONO MM to REC OUT, 3V ........................................... Less than 0.01% Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (Input Shorted) (EFFECT OFF) .................. More than 96 dB PHONO MM (Input Shorted 5 mV) (EFFECT OFF) ....................More than 86 dB Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) MAIN L/R SP OUT ............ Less than 170 µV Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input 5.1 k-ohms Shorted (EFFECT OFF) 1 kHz/10 kHz ........ More than 60 dB/45 dB PHONO MM Input Shorted (EFFECT OFF) 1 kHz/10 kHz ..........More than 60 dB/55 dB Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB (50 Hz) Turnover frequency ........................ 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±10 dB (20 kHz) Turnover frequency ....................... 3.5 kHz Bass Extension (MAIN L/R) ....................................................+6 dB (50 Hz) S-Video Signal Level Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms Maximum Input Level ....... More than 1.5 Vp-p Signal-to-Noise Ratio ........... More than 50 dB Monitor Out Frequency Response ..................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia, China, Singapore and General models] .............................87.5 to 108.0 MHz 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms, 100% mod., 1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] Mono.................................1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) Stereo ................................23 µV (38.5 dBf) Usable Sensitivity (75 ohms) [Australia and Singapore models only] DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) .....................0.9 µV DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB).....................28 µV Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only]..........................................75 dB Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300 kHz) [Australia and Singapore models only] ..............................................................55 dB SPECIFICATIONS Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] Mono/Stereo ..................................0.1/0.2% [Australia and Singapore models] Mono/Stereo (40 kHz Dev.) ...........0.1/0.2% Stereo Separation (1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ..............................................................48 dB [Australia and Singapore models (40 kHz Dev.)].......................................48 dB Frequency Response 20 Hz to 15 kHz ..................................0±1 dB AM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ........................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz [Australia and Singapore models] ............................................531 to 1,611 kHz Usable Sensitivity ..............................300 µV/m Signal-to-Noise Ratio ..............................52 dB AUDIO SECTION Output Level/Impedance FM (100% mod., 1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ........................550 mV/1.0 k-ohms [Australia and Singapore models (40 kHz Dev.)] ..............550 mV/1.0 k-ohms AM (30% mod., 1 kHz) ....150 mV/1.0 k-ohms AC Outlets 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS [U.S.A., China, Singapore and General models] ............................ 100W max. total [Canada model] ........100W/1.0A max. total 1 SWITCHED OUTLET [Australia model] ...................... 100W max. English Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ....................................81 dB/75 dB (DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo [Australia and Singapore models] .................................................75 dB/69 dB Dimensions (W x H x D) ........................................ 435 x 171 x 391 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15-3/8”) Weight ................................ 14.1 kg (31.1 lbs.) GENERAL Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................. AC 120V/60 Hz [Australia model] .................. AC 240V/50 Hz [Singapore model] ................ AC 230V/50 Hz [China and General models] .................. AC 110/120/220/240V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption [U.S.A., Australia, China, Singapore and General models] ................................. 400W [Canada model]........................400W/540 VA Accessories ..........................Remote controller Batteries User function stickers AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] ...........................750W 83 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Malaysia V303930
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88

Yamaha RX-V995 Handleiding

Categorie
Ontvanger
Type
Handleiding